WO2013073196A1 - Image editing device, image editing program, electronic information terminal device, pointing device, and input system - Google Patents
Image editing device, image editing program, electronic information terminal device, pointing device, and input system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2013073196A1 WO2013073196A1 PCT/JP2012/007389 JP2012007389W WO2013073196A1 WO 2013073196 A1 WO2013073196 A1 WO 2013073196A1 JP 2012007389 W JP2012007389 W JP 2012007389W WO 2013073196 A1 WO2013073196 A1 WO 2013073196A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- image
- display
- color
- unit
- displayed
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
- G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
- G06F3/0412—Digitisers structurally integrated in a display
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0484—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
- G06F3/04845—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range for image manipulation, e.g. dragging, rotation, expansion or change of colour
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
- G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
- G06F3/04883—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures for inputting data by handwriting, e.g. gesture or text
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06V—IMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
- G06V30/00—Character recognition; Recognising digital ink; Document-oriented image-based pattern recognition
- G06V30/10—Character recognition
- G06V30/14—Image acquisition
- G06V30/142—Image acquisition using hand-held instruments; Constructional details of the instruments
- G06V30/1423—Image acquisition using hand-held instruments; Constructional details of the instruments the instrument generating sequences of position coordinates corresponding to handwriting
Definitions
- the present invention relates to an image editing apparatus, an image editing program, an electronic information terminal, a pointing device, and an input system.
- an image editing apparatus that processes an image while changing the display magnification of the image displayed on the editing screen or rotating the displayed image.
- an enlargement / reduction button or a rotation button provided on the editing screen is operated to enlarge / reduce the image to an intended display magnification, or to rotate the image,
- the image is enlarged / reduced or rotated by dragging the pointer with the control point provided on the screen.
- this control point is used, when a part of the image protrudes from the editing screen, the control point provided at the peripheral edge of the image also protrudes from the editing screen. For this reason, there has been proposed a method in which a grid is superimposed on an image and the image is enlarged / reduced or rotated by dragging in a predetermined direction with the pointer in contact with the displayed grid. (See Patent Document 1).
- an image editing apparatus includes a display unit including a display area for displaying an image, and the image displayed in the display area of the display unit.
- control point is composed of a control point for scaling the image or a control point for rotating the image.
- the resetting unit controls the partial region of the image displayed on the display region. It is preferable to reset the points.
- the image processing unit further includes an image processing unit that performs a trimming process on the image.
- the resetting unit performs the trimming process.
- the control point set for the previous image is reset to the control point set for the image on which the trimming process has been executed.
- the display control unit may display an image immediately before the trimming process and a control point set before the trimming process. preferable.
- the display control unit displays the display mode of the first area cut out by the trimming process and the second area excluding the first area in different display modes.
- the image editing apparatus moves a display unit that displays a plurality of images in a superimposed manner and any one of the plurality of images, and once cancels the registration with the other images.
- a display control unit that changes a display order of the superimposed images when the moved image is superimposed on the other image.
- the display unit includes a display area for displaying the plurality of images, and a permission unit that allows the display order to be changed in response to the moved image reaching the outer periphery of the display area. It is to be prepared.
- the display order is changed depending on the positional relationship of the other image with respect to the moved image.
- the display control unit moves the moved image so as to approach the other image, when one image is located within a predetermined range with respect to the moved image, It is preferable that the display order of the moved image and the display order of the one image are switched.
- the display control unit moves the moved image so as to approach the other image, two images are located within a predetermined range with respect to the moved image. In this case, it is preferable to change the display order of the superimposed images so that the display order of the moved image is between the display orders of the two images.
- an operation member that is operated when moving any of the plurality of images is further provided.
- the operation member is preferably a touch panel.
- the image editing program of the present invention includes a setting step for setting a control point when operating the image with respect to the image displayed in the display area, and the size of the displayed image is the display area.
- the image editing program according to the present invention includes a display step of displaying a plurality of images in a superimposed manner, and moving any one of the plurality of images to temporarily cancel the registration with the other images.
- the computer can execute a display control process for changing the display order of the superimposed images when the moved image is superimposed on the other image. .
- the electronic information terminal of the present invention includes a display device that displays a plurality of pages in units of pages, a touch panel that receives an input operation on the page displayed on the display device, and an input operation that is received by the touch panel. And first determination means for determining whether or not an input operation for separating at least a part of the page displayed on the display device has been performed based on an operation direction at the time of the input operation, and the first determination Display control means for separating and displaying at least a part of the page on the display device when it is determined that an input operation for separating at least a part of the page is performed by the means. .
- the display control means is a transmission destination for transmitting the content input to at least a part of the page to another electronic information terminal when at least a part of the page is displayed on the display device.
- the touch panel accepts an input operation for displaying a list and selecting a destination from the destination list, an electronic information terminal serving as the destination for the content input to at least a part of the page A transmission means for transmitting to the machine is provided.
- Second determination means for determining whether or not an input operation for transmitting the content input to the electronic information terminal as the target transmission destination has been performed, wherein the transmission means includes the second When it is determined that an input operation for transmitting the content input to at least a part of the page by the determination unit to the electronic information terminal serving as the target transmission destination is performed, at least a part of the page It is preferable to transmit the content input to the electronic information terminal as the target transmission destination.
- an input operation accepted by the touch panel performs an input operation to delete the content input to at least a part of the page.
- a third determination unit that determines whether or not the page has been received, and at least a part of the page when the third determination unit determines that an input operation for deleting at least a part of the page has been performed.
- Content deletion means for deleting the input content is provided.
- the pointing device of the present invention is operated when the input unit is in contact with or close to the display screen of the electronic information terminal that accepts the input operation, and the input unit is in contact with or close to the display screen.
- a first operation unit; a device-side reception unit that receives color information on the display screen from the electronic information terminal at a position where the input unit is in contact with or close to the first operation unit; and the device And a color display unit for displaying a color based on the color information received by the side receiving unit.
- a device-side control unit that displays the level of the color on the color display unit is provided.
- the color display in the color display unit is received later in time than the color display based on the color information received earlier in time. It has a single color mode for updating to a color display based on color information.
- the display of the color in the color display unit is changed from the display of the color based on the color information received earlier in time. It has a color mixing mode for updating to a color display obtained by mixing colors based on each.
- the operation time of the first operation unit, the number of operations of the first operation unit, or the first operation unit when receiving a plurality of pieces of color information obtained before and after time Based on the pressure applied during the operation, a ratio setting unit that sets a ratio when colors based on the plurality of color information are mixed, and a ratio set by the ratio setting unit is used to change the time. And a generation unit that generates color information of a color obtained by mixing colors based on a plurality of color information received.
- the color display unit displays a moving image showing a state in which colors based on a plurality of color information received before and after the time are mixed.
- the input system of the present invention includes the above-described pointing device and an electronic information terminal having a touch panel on the display screen, and the pointing device displays color information used when performing the input operation.
- a device-side transmission unit configured to transmit to the electronic information terminal, wherein the electronic information terminal receives an operation of the first operation unit of the pointing device, and an input unit of the pointing device comes into contact or proximity
- a terminal-side transmission unit that transmits color information at a position to be transmitted toward the device-side reception unit, and a terminal-side reception that receives color information transmitted from the device-side transmission unit during an input operation using the pointing device And the color information received by the terminal-side receiving unit using the pointing device. Characterized in that it and a terminal-side controller to be displayed on the display screen drawing based on.
- a portable electronic information terminal it is a perspective view which shows an external appearance when a fastener is removed.
- a perspective view which shows the external appearance in a 1st state of a portable electronic information terminal It is a functional block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a portable electronic information terminal.
- It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen in the 1st state of a portable electronic information terminal.
- (A) is a figure which shows an example in case the perforation displayed in order to cut
- disconnect a page consists of a straight line along a y direction
- (b) is a line along the y direction and a perforation along the x direction. It is a figure which shows an example in the case of consisting of a combination with a straight line.
- (A) is a figure which shows an example of input operation which separates a page
- (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display in the 1st display part and 2nd display part after performing input operation which separates a page. It is a figure which shows an example of the display in the 1st display part at the time of transmitting mail.
- (A) is a figure which shows the case where "x" which shows deleting the separated page is input
- (b) is a figure which shows an example of input operation in the case of deleting the page which inputted "x”.
- It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process which transmits the content input by handwriting by mail, and the process which deletes the content input by handwriting.
- It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of an electronic pen.
- It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in an electronic pen when drawing.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 of the present invention has an appearance simulating a system notebook with a belt.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 includes an apparatus main body 15, a belt 16 and a pen holder 17.
- the apparatus body 15 includes a first housing 20, a second housing 21, and a hinge part 22.
- the apparatus main body 15 can be held in a folded state.
- the apparatus main body 15 rotates at least one of the first casing 20 and the second casing 21 of the folded apparatus main body 15 relative to the other casing, thereby causing the apparatus main body 15 to rotate. Can be expanded.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 having a folded structure of two folds is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a portable electronic information terminal having a folded structure of three or more folds. Also good. Further, in addition to the portable electronic information terminal having a folding structure, the portable electronic information terminal having a slide structure that is configured by a plurality of casings and that can slide each of the plurality of casings relatively. Even so, the present invention can be achieved.
- a state in which the apparatus main body 15 is folded in two will be referred to as a second state
- a state in which the housing main body 15 is expanded will be referred to as a first state.
- a first display unit 25 and a second display unit 28, which will be described later, are stored in a state of facing each other.
- the first housing 20 includes a first display unit 25 on the surface 20a.
- the first housing 20 includes a lens surface 26 of an imaging unit 51 and a light emitting surface 27 of a flash device 57, which will be described later, on a surface 20b opposite to the surface 20a.
- the lens surface 26 and the light emitting surface 27 are disposed at the end opposite to the end where the hinge portion 22 is provided in the x direction in FIG. 2 and at the approximate center of the first housing 20 in the y direction in FIG.
- the A female member 31 of a fastener 30 protruding from the surface 20b is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the lens surface 26.
- the second housing 21 includes a second display unit 28 on the surface 21a. Further, the second casing 21 includes a belt 16 on the side surface 21b.
- the belt 16 is provided at the substantially center in the y direction in FIG. 3 at the end opposite to the one end connected to the first housing 20 by the hinge 22 in the x direction in FIG. That is, one end of the belt 16 is a fixed end attached to the second housing 21, and the other end is a free end.
- the length of the belt 16 is such that, for example, when the electronic pen 40 is attached to the pen holder 17 and the belt 16 is wound around the apparatus body 15 on the first housing 20 side, the position of the free end of the belt 16 is The length is set to be closer to the hinge portion 22 than the position of the female member 31 of the fastener 30.
- a pen holder 17 is provided on the fixed end side of the belt 16.
- An electronic pen 40 called a stylus pen is attached to the pen holder 17.
- the electronic pen 40 is attached to the pen holder 17, the present invention is not limited to this, and a fountain pen or a ball pencil may be attached in addition to the electronic pen 40.
- the electronic pen 40 is used when inputting to the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28.
- the male member 32 of the fastener 30 is provided on the free end side of the belt 16 described above.
- the position at which the male member 32 of the fastener 30 provided on the belt 16 is provided is the female member of the fastener 30 provided on the first housing 20 when the belt 16 is wound around the outer periphery of the apparatus main body 15. 31 is a position where it can be fitted.
- the fastener 30 is composed of, for example, a snap button type fastener including the female member 31 provided in the first housing 20 and the male member 32 provided on the free end side of the belt 16. .
- the fastener 30 is formed by fitting a male member 32 provided on the belt 16 to a female member 31 provided on the first housing 20 when the portable electronic information terminal 10 is not used. Any one of the first housing 20 and the second housing 21 is prevented from rotating with respect to the other.
- the lens surface 26 of the imaging unit 51 is covered by fitting the female member 31 and the male member 32 of the fastener 30 together. Therefore, the fastener 30 also functions as a lens cap (lens cover). Further, when the female member 31 and the male member 32 of the fastener 30 are fitted together, a power switch 63 described later is turned off, and when the fitting between the female member 31 and the male member 32 is released, the power switch 63 is turned on. Become.
- FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the portable electronic information terminal 10.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 includes an imaging unit 51, an A / D converter 52, a buffer memory 53, an image processing circuit 54, a first display unit 25, a second display unit 28, a display control circuit 55, a controller 56, a flash.
- a device 57, a tilt sensor 58, a CPU 59, a built-in memory 60, a data memory 61, a communication unit 62, a power switch 63, a power circuit 64, and a power device 65 are provided.
- the A / D converter 52, the buffer memory 53, the image processing circuit 54, the display control circuit 55, the controller 56, the flash device 57, the tilt sensor 58, the CPU 59, the built-in memory 60, the data memory 61, and the communication unit 62 are respectively Connection is made via a bus 66.
- the image pickup unit 51 includes an image pickup optical system 68 and an image pickup element 69, which are composed of unit parts held by a holder (not shown).
- the imaging optical system 68 may be composed of a single lens or a plurality of lenses.
- a CCD image sensor or a CMOS image sensor is used as the imaging element 69.
- the image pickup optical system 68 and the image pickup element 69 are driven and controlled by the CPU 59.
- the A / D converter 52 converts the image signal output from the image sensor 69 from an analog image signal to a digital image signal.
- the digital image signal converted by the A / D converter 52 is written in the buffer memory 53.
- the image processing circuit 54 performs well-known image processing such as white balance processing and gradation conversion processing on the image signal written in the buffer memory 53. In addition to this, the image processing circuit 54 also executes processing based on image editing, such as image trimming processing, image rendering processing, and image composition processing.
- the first display unit 25 includes a display device 70 and a touch panel 71.
- the display device 70 for example, an LCD or an organic EL display is used.
- the touch panel 71 is, for example, an electromagnetic induction type touch panel.
- the touch panel 71 is disposed on the back side of the display device 70.
- the writing force is determined based on the strength of the electromagnetic wave that changes depending on the pressure applied to the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 that is in contact. Detect pressure.
- the electromagnetic induction type touch panel is mentioned as the touch panel 71 provided in the 1st display part 25, it is not necessary to be limited to this.
- a touch panel corresponding to the method used for the electronic pen may be used. That is, this touch panel 71 is a combination of an electromagnetic induction type touch panel and any one of a resistive type and capacitive type touch panel in addition to a resistive type and capacitive type touch panel. May be. By using such a touch panel, an input operation with a user's finger can be performed in addition to an input operation with the electronic pen 40.
- the second display unit 28 includes a display device 72 and a touch panel 73.
- the display device 70 for example, an LCD or an organic EL display is used for the display device 72.
- the touch panel 73 for example, a resistive film type touch panel is used.
- the touch panel 73 is disposed on the front surface of the display device 72. The touch panel 73 detects a position where an input operation is performed with the electronic pen 40 or the user's finger, in other words, a position where the electronic pen 40 or the user's finger contacts.
- the touch panel 73 used for the 2nd display part 28 although the resistive film type touch panel is mentioned as an example, it is not necessary to be limited to this, As with the touch panel 71 provided in the 1st display part 25, An electromagnetic induction type touch panel may be used, or both a resistive film type touch panel and an electromagnetic induction type touch panel may be used in combination.
- the display control circuit 55 executes display control for each of the display device 70 and the display device 72.
- the controller 56 drives the touch panel 71 and the touch panel 73 and outputs coordinate signals based on detection signals from the touch panel 71 and touch panel 73 to the CPU 59.
- the flash device 57 is a device that emits a flash toward the subject during shooting.
- the inclination sensor 58 for example, a gyro sensor or an acceleration sensor is used.
- a detection signal from the tilt sensor 58 is input to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 determines the tilt state of the apparatus main body 15 based on the detection signal from the tilt sensor 58.
- the CPU 59 controls each part of the portable electronic information terminal 10 by executing a control program stored in the built-in memory 60. For example, in response to the detection signal from the controller 56 described above, the CPU 59 acquires information such as the position coordinates of the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40, the writing pressure, and the tilt of the electronic pen 40. The CPU 59 outputs a control signal to the image processing circuit 54 and the display control circuit 55 based on the position coordinates and writing pressure information of the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40. Thereby, the process based on the input with the electronic pen 40 is performed.
- the processing based on the input by the electronic pen 40 includes, for example, image editing processing such as image trimming processing, image drawing processing, image composition processing, drawing, screen display switching, and movement of the displayed image. And the like.
- the CPU 59 determines the posture of the apparatus main body 15 from the information on the tilt of the electronic pen 40 and the detection signal from the tilt sensor 58. Then, the CPU 59 determines whether or not to change the orientation of the screen displayed on each of the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 based on the result of determining the posture of the apparatus main body 15. For example, when it is determined that the orientation of the screen displayed on each of the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 is to be changed, the CPU 59 controls the display of a control signal for changing the orientation and position of the screen. Output to the circuit 55. Thereby, the orientation of the screen displayed on each of the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 is changed based on the tilt of the apparatus main body 15 or the tilt of the electronic pen 40.
- the built-in memory 60 stores a control program executed by the CPU 59 and various data.
- the data memory 61 stores image data, illustration image data, sticker image data, WEB data, etc., which will be described later, classified according to the type of data.
- the communication unit 62 transmits / receives data and signals to / from the external device 74 using any one of wired communication and wireless communication methods.
- Reference numeral 74a denotes a communication unit provided in an external device.
- the external device 74 include an image pickup apparatus represented by a digital camera, a portable electronic information terminal, a computer, and the like.
- the power switch 63 is provided to turn on / off the main power of the portable electronic information terminal 10.
- the power switch 63 is turned off when the female member 31 of the fastener 30 is fitted to the male member 32, and is turned on when the fitting between the female member 31 and the male member 32 of the fastener 30 is released. Become.
- As the power switch 63 either a mechanical switch or an electronic switch is used. You may make it provide the power switch 63 used as the power switch floor by the fastener 30 separately.
- the power supply circuit 64 executes control for supplying power only to the CPU 59 when the power switch 63 is turned off.
- the power supply circuit 64 supplies power from the power supply device 65 to each part of the portable electronic information terminal 10 when the power switch 63 is turned on.
- the control of the power supply device 65 in the power supply circuit 64 is executed in response to a drive signal from the CPU 59.
- FIG. 5 shows a display screen when the portable electronic information terminal 10 is in use.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 displays screens corresponding to different functions on the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 described above.
- the screens displayed on the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 are linked to each other.
- the first display unit 25 displays a work screen.
- the work screen include an editing screen and a shooting screen.
- the editing screen is a screen for performing editing operations such as drawing, handwriting input of characters, image trimming, and image synthesis.
- the shooting screen is a screen that displays a through image captured by the imaging unit 51 and an image obtained by shooting. These screens are displayed from the tab display. That is, the above-described editing screen and shooting screen are provided with tabs.
- the tab name “edit” indicates the editing screen
- the tab name “camera” indicates the shooting screen.
- FIG. 5 shows a case where an edit screen is displayed.
- Switching between the edit screen and the shooting screen is performed by bringing the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 close to or in contact with the position of the tab used, or the input switch 41 or the input switch of the electronic pen 40.
- This is executed by moving the electronic pen 40 in the ⁇ x direction or the x direction in a state where any one of 42 is close to or in contact with the first display unit 25.
- an operation of moving the electronic pen 40 in the ⁇ x direction or the x direction in a state where either the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 is brought close to or in contact with the first display unit 25 will be described. 40 is referred to as an operation.
- the editing screen may be a plurality of screens instead of a single screen
- switching between the editing screens is also performed by performing an operation with the electronic pen 40.
- a display used for switching between screens for example, a moving image display imitating an operation of turning a page of a notebook is cited.
- the above-described imaging unit 51 is activated. Through images are acquired at predetermined time intervals by the activation of the imaging unit 51. The through images are sequentially displayed on the first display unit 25. As a result, live view display is executed on the first display unit 25. When an input operation using the electronic pen 40 is executed during the live view display, an imaging process is executed. The imaging process using the electronic pen 40 will be described later. When the imaging process is executed, an image obtained by the imaging process is displayed on the first display unit 25. Then, when the screen displayed on the first display unit 25 is switched from the shooting screen to the editing screen by an input operation using the electronic pen 40, the driving of the imaging unit 51 is stopped.
- the second display unit 28 displays the library screen.
- Examples of the library screen include an image list screen, an illustration image list screen, a seal image list screen, and a WEB screen.
- the image list screen displays a list of images (including still images and moving images) stored in the portable electronic information terminal 10, and the illustration image list screen displays a list of illustration images obtained by drawing. This is the screen to be displayed.
- the sticker image list screen is a screen for displaying a list of decoration images (hereinafter referred to as sticker images) used at the time of image synthesis
- the WEB screen is a screen for displaying a list of WEB data (for example, mail address data).
- the tab name “photo” indicates the image list screen
- the tab name “illustration” indicates the illustration image list screen
- the tab name “seal” indicates the seal image list screen
- the tab name “WEB” indicates the WEB screen. Is.
- the switching of the screen in the library screen is executed by a tab selection operation using the electronic pen 40 or an operation using the electronic pen 40, similarly to the screen switching on the work screen. Also in this case, when there are a plurality of screens in each tab, the screen switching display is executed by an operation with the electronic pen 40. Note that the addition and deletion of tabs on the library screen described above can be performed by an input operation using the electronic pen 40.
- FIG. 6 shows an example of an editing operation by an input operation of the electronic pen 40.
- the screen displayed on the first display unit 25 is an editing screen
- editing functions such as image trimming and image composition are executed. be able to.
- the electronic pen 40 is used to input characters intended by the user or draw a picture.
- the line type, line color, and the like can be changed by selecting the setting items displayed on the first display unit 25 using the electronic pen 40, for example.
- the touch panel 71 used for the first display unit 25 is disposed on the back side of the display device 70. For this reason, when performing a drawing operation, a character input operation, or a selection operation using the electronic pen 40, the position of the tip of the electronic pen 40 and the actual input operation are performed under the influence of the thickness of the display device 70 and the like. The position that is displayed may shift. For this reason, it is preferable to display the actual input operation position (pointing position) in the electronic pen 40 when the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 approaches.
- an image displayed on the image list screen displayed on the second display unit 28 is edited.
- the user uses the electronic pen 40 to display the image. 75 is selected, and the electronic pen 40 is operated in the F direction.
- the selected image 75 moves in the same direction as the operation with the electronic pen 40 (in this case, the F direction), and is stopped at a predetermined position on the first display unit 25. . That is, by performing the above-described operation, the selected image is thrown from the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28 to the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25 (see FIG. 7B).
- the moving direction and speed of the moving image and the stop position are set according to the moving direction and moving speed of the electronic pen 40.
- the images may overlap on the editing screen.
- the moving location of each image is adjusted so as to be shifted by a preset distance.
- the editing operation can be executed.
- the first display unit 25 is switched from the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28.
- the operation is performed by operating the electronic pen 40 while the image is selected with the electronic pen 40.
- FIG. 8 shows an example when an image is displayed on the editing screen of the first display unit 25.
- an operation bar (enlargement / reduction bar) 81 for enlargement or reduction along each side of the selected image 80 is provided on the outer periphery of the image 80.
- 82, 83, 84 and operation bars (rotation bars) 85, 86, 87, 88 for rotation along the four corners of the image 80 are displayed.
- the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are examples of control points set when an image is operated.
- the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 are operated when the image 80 is enlarged or reduced.
- any one of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 is moved in either the direction away from the center C of the image 80 or the direction approaching the center C, the image is enlarged or centered on the center C of the image 80, for example. Reduced.
- FIG. 9A shows a case where, for example, the enlargement / reduction bar 84 is operated by the electronic pen 40.
- the image 80 displayed on the editing screen has a size indicated by a two-dot chain line from a size indicated by a solid line in the drawing.
- the image 80 displayed on the editing screen becomes a dotted line from the size indicated by the solid line in the figure.
- Reduced to the size indicated by. 9A illustrates the case where the enlargement / reduction bar 84 is operated with the electronic pen 40, the same applies to the case where other enlargement / reduction bars are operated.
- the aspect ratio is fixed.
- the image having a fixed aspect ratio is enlarged or reduced.
- the image C is enlarged or reduced with the center C of the image 80 as a base point, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the base point is one of the two corners of the image 80 opposite to the moved enlargement / reduction bar. Or may be enlarged or reduced.
- Rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are operated when the image 80 is rotated.
- FIG. 9B shows a case where the image displayed on the solid line in the figure is rotated to the position indicated by the two-dot chain line with the center C of the image 80 as the base point when the rotation bar 86 is rotated in the R1 direction. Is illustrated. The same applies when other rotating bars are moved in the R1 direction or the R2 direction.
- the image 80 is rotated with the center C of the image 80 as a base point.
- the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the vertex of the image 80 Of 80a, 80b, 80c, and 80d (see FIG. 10B), it is also possible to rotate with a vertex at a position facing the rotation bar as a base point.
- the display mode of the operated operation bar is not described, but the display of the operated operation bar is displayed differently from the display of other operation bars. It's okay.
- the color of the operated operation bar is displayed in a color different from the colors of other operation bars so that the operated operation bar can be easily recognized, or only the operated operation bar is displayed.
- Other operation bars may be hidden or displayed semi-transparently.
- a comment corresponding to the operation bar to be operated can be displayed in the vicinity of the operation bar.
- Some operations on the operation bar described above may cause part of the image 80 to be edited to protrude from the editing screen of the first display unit 25.
- FIG. 10A when the enlargement / reduction bar 81 is moved in the H direction using the electronic pen 40, the image 80 is enlarged according to the amount of movement of the enlargement / reduction bar 81.
- the enlargement / reduction bar 81 is continuously moved in the H direction using the electronic pen 40, any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and any of the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are edited. It may stick out.
- FIG. 10B shows a state where both ends in the longitudinal direction of the image 80 protrude from the edit screen displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the expansion / contraction bars 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 protrude from the editing screen.
- Enlargement / reduction bars 81 and 82 are displayed for the image 80 displayed on the editing screen.
- the enlargement / reduction bar 83, 84 or the rotation bar protruded by reducing the image 80 using any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, or by shifting the position of the image 80 displayed on the editing screen.
- One of 85, 86, 87, and 88 needs to be displayed.
- an enlargement / reduction bar and a rotation bar are newly set in accordance with a part of the image displayed on the editing screen, and the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar are displayed.
- the enlargement / reduction bar 81 ′ along each of the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion of the image 80 displayed on the editing screen is displayed.
- 82 ′, enlargement / reduction bars 83 ′, 84 ′ along the vertical direction (y direction) of the editing screen are displayed.
- rotation bars 85 ', 86', 87 ', 88' are displayed near the four corners of a part of the image 80 displayed on the editing screen. By displaying these operation bars, editing operations such as enlarging or reducing the image 80 or rotating the image 80 can be performed without changing the size of the image displayed on the editing screen.
- FIG. 12 shows a case where the vertex 80a is displayed as a part of the image.
- the rotation bar 85 is displayed as an operation bar for the image 80. That is, as an editing operation on the image 80, an operation for rotating the image 80 in addition to the enlargement or reduction of the image 80 can be executed.
- any of the vertices of the image 80 is displayed on the editing screen when the image 80 is a polygon such as a rectangle
- the operation bar set when the image is selected is displayed. There is no need to newly set an operation bar based on a part of the image displayed on the editing screen.
- a new operation bar is set and set for a part of the image displayed on the editing screen.
- the operation bars (enlargement / reduction bars 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 and rotation bars 96, 97, 98, 99, 100) can be displayed together with the image 80.
- Step S101 is processing for selecting an image.
- the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71.
- the controller 56 specifies the position coordinates at which the electronic pen 40 is detected.
- the CPU 59 specifies the image 80 selected by the electronic pen 40 from the position coordinates of each image displayed on the display device 70 and the position coordinates specified by the controller 56.
- Step S102 is a process for displaying an enlargement / reduction bar and a rotation bar.
- the CPU 59 sets the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 with reference to the position coordinates of the image specified in step S101. Then, the CPU 59 outputs information on the selected image and information on the settings of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 displays enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 on the outer periphery of the image displayed on the display device 70 (FIG. 9 ( a)).
- Step S103 is a process for determining whether or not there is detection by the touch panel.
- the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 is brought close to or in contact with the first display unit 25.
- the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71.
- the controller 56 specifies the position coordinates where the input switch 41 is detected.
- the controller 56 outputs position coordinate information to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 determines that there is detection by the touch panel 71.
- the determination result of step S103 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S104.
- the CPU 59 determines that there is no detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the determination result of step S103 is No, and the process returns to step S101.
- Step S104 is a process of determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel is within the area of the enlargement / reduction bar. Based on the determination result in step S103, the position coordinate information detected by the touch panel 71 is input from the controller 56 to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 uses the position coordinates input from the controller 56 to determine whether it is included in any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84. For example, when the position coordinates input from the controller 56 are included in any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S104 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S105.
- step S104 sets the determination result in step S104 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S115.
- Step S105 is a process for determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel is moving away from the center of the image.
- the input switch of the electronic pen 40 that is in proximity to or in contact with the first display unit 25 is detected by the touch panel 71.
- the CPU 59 specifies the moving direction of the enlargement / reduction bar specified in step S ⁇ b> 105 from the position coordinate information output from the controller 56. If the moving direction is a direction away from the position coordinates of the center C of the image, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S105 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S106. On the other hand, if the moving direction is other than the direction away from the position coordinates of the center of the image, the CPU 59 determines No in step S105. In this case, the process proceeds to step S111.
- Step S106 is a process for setting the enlargement ratio of the image.
- the CPU 59 sets the enlargement ratio of the image 80 using the position coordinates of the input detection position.
- the image processing circuit 54 executes enlargement processing on the image data that is the basis of the displayed image, using the obtained enlargement ratio information.
- Step S107 is a process for resetting the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar.
- the CPU 59 estimates the size of the image to be enlarged using the enlargement rate set in step S106.
- the CPU 59 compares the size of the image to be enlarged with the size of the editing screen. In this comparison, when the size of the image to be enlarged is a size that fits within the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the size of the image to be enlarged.
- the CPU 59 executes the following processing.
- the CPU 59 determines whether any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen. When any of the vertices of the image is included in the edit screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the sides and vertices displayed on the edit screen in the enlarged image. On the other hand, when all the vertices of the image are out of the editing screen (displaced), the CPU 59 enlarges / reduces the rotation bar and the rotation bar according to the area displayed on the editing screen in the enlarged image. To reset. Note that the information of the enlarged / reduced bar and rotation bar that have been reset is read by the display control circuit 55 together with the image data that has been subjected to the enlargement process.
- Step S108 is an enlarged display of the image.
- the display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the input image data by replacing the previously displayed image. At the time of this display, an enlarged image is displayed so that the center C of the previously displayed image matches the center of the enlarged image. Further, the display control circuit 55 displays one of the operation bars on the peripheral edge of the image based on the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar.
- FIG. 11 when all the vertices of the image 80 protrude from the editing screen, new enlargement / reduction bars 81 ′, 82 ′, 83 ′, 84 ′ and rotation bars 85 ′, 86 ′, 87 ′. , 88 'are displayed.
- FIG. 12 when any one of the vertices of the image 80 (vertex 80a in FIG. 12) is displayed, enlargement / reduction bars 81 and 83 and a rotation bar 85 are displayed.
- Step S109 is processing for determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel has changed.
- the position coordinate of the detection position is specified by the controller 56, and the position coordinate information of the detection position is input to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 refers to the input position coordinate information of the detection position to determine whether or not the detection position has changed.
- the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S109. In this case, the process proceeds to step S110.
- step S109 determines whether the detection position on the touch panel 71 has changed. If the detection position on the touch panel 71 has changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S109 to No. In this case, the process returns to step S105.
- Step S110 is a process of determining whether there is a detection on the touch panel.
- the detection signal is not output from the touch panel 71, and the position coordinate information of the detection position is not output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 determines whether or not there is a detection on the touch panel 71 depending on whether or not position coordinate information of the detection position is input.
- the CPU 59 determines that the touch panel 71 is not detected. That is, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S110 to Yes, and returns to the process in step S101.
- the CPU 59 determines that the touch panel 71 is detected. That is, the CPU 59 sets the determination result of step S110 to No, and returns to the process of step S104.
- step S105 If the determination result of step S105 described above is No, the process proceeds to step S111.
- Step S111 is a process for setting an image reduction ratio.
- the determination result in step S105 is No, the detected position on the touch panel 71 is moving in a direction approaching the center of the image.
- the CPU 59 sets the image reduction ratio using the position coordinates of the input detection position.
- the image processing circuit 54 executes a reduction process on the image data that is the basis of the displayed image, using the obtained reduction ratio information.
- Step S112 is resetting of the expansion / contraction bar and the rotation bar.
- the CPU 59 estimates the size of the image to be reduced using the reduction rate set in step S111.
- the CPU 59 compares the size of the image to be reduced with the size of the editing screen. In this comparison, when the size of the image 80 to be reduced is a size that can be accommodated in the editing screen, the CPU 59 adjusts the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84, and the size of the image 80 to be enlarged.
- the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are reset.
- the CPU 59 executes the following processing.
- the CPU 59 determines whether any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen. If any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the sides and vertices displayed on the editing screen in the reduced image. On the other hand, if all the vertices of the image are out of the editing screen (out of), the CPU 59 enlarges / reduces and rotates the bar in accordance with the area displayed on the editing screen in the reduced image. To reset. Note that the information on the reset enlargement / reduction bar and rotation bar is read by the display control circuit 55 together with the image data subjected to the reduction process.
- Step S113 is a reduced display of the image.
- the display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the input image data by replacing the previously displayed image. At the time of this display, an image reduced so that the center C of the previously displayed image coincides with the center of the reduced image is displayed. Further, the display control circuit 55 displays one of the operation bars on the peripheral edge of the image based on the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar.
- the process of step S113 proceeds to step S109.
- the image is enlarged or reduced by the operation of the touch panel 71.
- the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar are reset according to the area of the image displayed on the editing screen.
- step S104 determines whether the determination result of step S104 described above is No. If the determination result of step S104 described above is No, the process proceeds to step S115.
- Step S115 is a process of determining whether or not the detection position of the touch panel is within the area of the rotation bar. Based on the determination result in step S103, the position coordinate information detected by the touch panel 71 is input from the controller 56 to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 determines whether or not the position coordinates input from the controller 56 are included in any position coordinate range of the rotation bar. For example, when the position coordinates input from the controller 56 are included in the range of any position coordinates of the rotation bar, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S115 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S116. On the other hand, when the position coordinate input from the controller 56 is not included in any position coordinate range of the rotation bar, the CPU 59 determines No in step S115. In this case, the process proceeds to step S110.
- Step S116 is a process for determining whether or not the detection position of the touch panel has moved.
- the CPU 59 determines that there is detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the process proceeds to step S117.
- the determination process of step S116 is executed until the determination result of step S116 is Yes.
- Step S117 is a process for setting the rotation angle of the image.
- the CPU 59 sets the rotation angle of the image 80 based on the position coordinate information output from the controller 56.
- the image processing circuit 54 performs rotation processing on the image data that is the basis of the displayed image 80 using the information on the obtained rotation angle.
- Step S118 is a process for resetting the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar.
- the CPU 59 determines whether or not the image 80 rotated at the rotation angle set in step S117 fits on the editing screen. In this determination, if the rotated image fits within the editing screen, the CPU 59 re-scales the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 according to the rotated image. Set. On the other hand, when the rotated image 80 protrudes from the editing screen, the CPU 59 executes the following processing.
- the CPU 59 determines whether any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen. When any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the sides and vertices included in the editing screen in the rotated image. On the other hand, when all the vertices of the image protrude from the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the area displayed on the editing screen in the rotated image. It should be noted that the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar is read by the display control circuit 55 together with the image data subjected to the rotation process.
- Step S119 is a rotation display of the image.
- the display control circuit 55 replaces the image displayed on the display device 66 with the newly acquired rotated image. At this time, the center of the newly displayed image is displayed so as to coincide with the center C of the original image 80. Further, the display control circuit 55 displays one of the operation bars on the peripheral edge of the image based on the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar.
- Step S120 is a process for determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel has changed.
- the position coordinate of the detection position is specified by the controller 56, and the position coordinate information of the detection position is input to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 refers to the input position coordinate information of the detection position to determine whether or not the detection position has changed.
- the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S120. In this case, the process proceeds to step S110.
- step S120 determines whether the detection position on the touch panel 71 has changed. If the detection position on the touch panel 71 has changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S120 to No. In this case, the process returns to step S117.
- the image trimming process will be described. For example, when an image is displayed on the editing screen of the first display unit 25, when the electronic pen 40 is moved along the region intended by the user, the inner region is trimmed. For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the trimming process is performed on the person image 110, the electronic pen 40 is moved with respect to the person area (see FIG. 16B). When the movement of the electronic pen 40 is completed, the inner area is cut out, and an image 111 based on the cut out area is obtained (see FIG. 16C).
- operation bars (enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88) are displayed along the outer periphery of the rectangular image 110.
- FIG. 16D On the other hand, for the trimmed image, for example, rectangular operation bars (enlargement / reduction bars 81 ′′, 82 ′′, 83 ′′, 84 ′′ and rotation bars 85 ′′, 86 so as to circumscribe the trimmed area). ", 87", 88 ”) is displayed (see FIG. 16E). If a rectangular area is trimmed with the electronic pen 40, an operation bar is displayed along the outer periphery of the trimmed rectangular area.
- the trimming process once executed may be performed again.
- the image 110 the area cut out by the previously performed trimming process (area corresponding to the image 111) is displayed as it is, and the other area that has not been cut out by the trimming process (FIG. 16 (f) with diagonal lines).
- the area shown) is translucent.
- the operation bar display for the image 111 obtained by the trimming process is canceled, and the operation bar is displayed for the original image 110 (see FIG. 16F).
- data relating to the trimmed area and image data may be stored in association with each other.
- the trimming process for the image displayed on the editing screen can be reset to a different area. Further, by displaying the area deleted by the trimming process in a translucent manner, it is possible to execute the trimming process again while confirming the area in the trimming process that has been executed once.
- an operation bar including an enlargement / reduction bar and a rotation bar is used as a control point.
- the present invention is not limited to this. Even when a point is provided, the present invention can be applied.
- the control point provided at the end of each side (the position to be the vertex) is used as a control point for rotating the image, and the control point provided at the midpoint of each side is used for enlarging or reducing the image. It can be a control point.
- electronic photo albums that are widely used include those in which images are arranged at predetermined intervals, and those in which a plurality of images are arranged by overlapping a part of images.
- a photo album in which a plurality of images are arranged by overlapping a part of images tends to be visually effective compared to a photo album in which images are arranged at predetermined intervals.
- there is a display that adjusts the gradation of the overlapping images for each layer so that the superimposed state can be recognized Japanese Patent No. 3380692.
- an image editing apparatus typified by the portable electronic information terminal taken as an example in the present embodiment aims to easily replace the hierarchical structure when a plurality of images are superimposed with a simple operation. .
- the operation of exchanging images is a process executed when, for example, a plurality of images are combined with a part of the images superimposed.
- a display order indicating the image hierarchy is assigned to each image.
- the image P2 displayed on the first display unit 25 is selected using the electronic pen 40.
- the selection of the image is executed by bringing the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 into contact with or close to the area of the image displayed on the editing screen of the first display unit 25. If the electronic pen 40 is moved in the y direction after the selection of the image P2, the image P2 moves in the y direction in accordance with the movement of the electronic pen 40. Due to the movement of the image P2, the superposition of the image P1 and the image P2 is once released.
- the electronic pen 40 moves to move the lower end of the image P ⁇ b> 2 to a position where the lower end of the editing screen of the first display unit 25 comes into contact, the display order of the two images is changed. Allowed.
- the moved image P2 may be automatically returned to the original position, or may be held at a position where the contact or proximity between the electronic pen 40 and the first display unit 25 is released.
- the image P2 moves so as to cover a part of the image P1 (see FIG. 19). That is, the display order of the image P1 and the image P2 is switched. That is, the display order of the image P1 is “2”, and the display order of the image P2 is “1”. At this time, it is not necessary to return to the position before the display order of the image P2 is changed, and the electronic pen 40 and the first display unit 25 may be held at the position when the contact or proximity is released. Note that when the contact or proximity between the electronic pen 40 and the first display unit 25 is released immediately after the change of the display order of the two images is permitted, before the state in which the positions of the images P2 are overlapped is released. It is also possible to automatically return to the position.
- the image P2 is moved, it is also possible to move the image P1 to cancel the overlapping of the image P1 and the image P2, and to overlap the image P2 and the image P1 again.
- the display order of the image P1 is “1” and the display order of the image P2 is “2”.
- the display order of the image P1 is “2” and the display order of the image P2 is “1”. Be changed.
- the image P2 is moved in the y direction to the lower edge of the editing screen, but is not limited to this, and is moved to any of the upper edge, the left edge, or the right edge of the editing screen. Also good.
- an image with a high display order covers an image with a low display order. Therefore, an image with a low display order is generally displayed in a state hidden behind an image with a high display order.
- an image with a low display order does not need to be hidden in an image with a high display order. For example, each image is displayed so that an image with a low display order can be seen through from an image with a high display order. It is also possible. In this case, mask processing is performed on an image having a high display order, and the transparency of the image is changed. This masking process may be performed only on the entire image or only on an area overlapping with an image with a low display order.
- FIG. 20 a case is considered where three images of an image P3, an image P4, and an image P5 are displayed on the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the display order of the image P3 is “3”
- the display order of the image P4 is “2”
- the display order of the image P5 is “1”.
- the image P5 displayed on the first display unit 25 is selected using the electronic pen 40.
- the electronic pen 40 is moved in the G direction in FIG. 21 after the selection of the image P5
- the image P5 moves in the same direction as the movement direction of the electronic pen 40.
- the superposition of the image P4 and the image P5 is once released.
- the display order of the image P5 and other images is allowed to be changed.
- the movement is performed.
- An image P5 to be inserted is inserted between the images P3 and P4 (see FIG. 23). That is, the display order of the image P3 is changed to “3”, the display order of the image P4 is “1”, and the display order of the image P5 is changed to “2”.
- Step S201 is a process of reading an image.
- the CPU 59 reads image data from the data memory 61.
- the image data read from the data memory 61 is image data selected by the electronic pen 40.
- Step S202 is processing for determining whether or not to process the read image.
- processing the read image includes, for example, image trimming processing, image processing such as gradation correction, and the like. If the input operation with the electronic pen 40 is an operation for processing the image, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S202 to Yes. In the case of other operations, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S202 to No.
- Step S203 is a process for processing an image.
- the CPU 59 reads the image data designated in step S201 from the data memory 61 and outputs it to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the input image data on the display device 70. Thereafter, in accordance with the operation with the electronic pen 40, the processing for the image displayed on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 is executed.
- the processed image data is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 53.
- Step S204 is a process for determining whether or not another image has been read. If the input operation with the electronic pen 40 is not an operation for reading another image, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S204 to Yes, and proceeds to step S205. On the other hand, if the input operation with the electronic pen 40 is an operation for reading out another image, the CPU 59 determines No in step S204 and returns to step S201. That is, the processes in steps S201 to S204 are repeated until all the images necessary for image composition are read out.
- Step S205 is a process for temporarily arranging images.
- the display control circuit 55 temporarily arranges the image read in step S201 to step S204 in the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the temporary placement of the image may be performed using a template for image composition, or the temporary placement of the image may be performed by placing the image read by the operation of the electronic pen 40 at a position intended by the user. Is possible.
- the display control circuit 55 temporarily positions each read image so that a part of the image overlaps. Then, the display control circuit 55 gives information related to the display order to each temporarily arranged image.
- Step S206 is a process for changing the display order of the images.
- the processing in step S206 is executed by moving any of the images in the editing screen by operating the electronic pen 40.
- Step S207 is a process for finely adjusting the arrangement of the images.
- the controller 56 acquires the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40.
- the CPU 59 specifies an image to be displayed on the display device 70 from the position coordinate information acquired by the controller 56.
- information on the position coordinates of the detected electronic pen 40 is input to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 obtains the movement direction and movement amount of the electronic pen 40 and outputs the obtained movement direction and movement amount of the electronic pen 40 to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 moves the image selected based on the moving direction and moving amount of the electronic pen 40. In this way, the position of each image displayed on the first display unit 25 is finely adjusted.
- Step S208 is a process of recording an image.
- the CPU 59 acquires the position coordinate information and the display order information of each image when the process of step S207 is executed, and outputs it to the image processing circuit 54.
- the image processing circuit 54 reads out the image data that is the basis of the displayed image from the data memory 61. Then, the image processing circuit 54 synthesizes these image data based on the position coordinate information and display order information of each image. Then, the image processing circuit 54 records the combined image data in the data memory 61 as, for example, JPEG format image data.
- the image is read from the data memory 61 by performing the processing of step S201 to step S204.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed on the library screen of the second display unit 28.
- a plurality of images may be moved from the second display unit 28 to the first display unit 25.
- Step S301 is a process of determining whether or not an image whose display order is to be changed (hereinafter referred to as a target image) is selected.
- the touch panel 71 detects the position of the electronic pen 40 and outputs a detection signal to the controller 56.
- the controller 56 acquires position coordinate information from the detection signal output from the touch panel 71.
- the acquired position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 is output to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 specifies the image at the position where the electronic pen 40 is detected from the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 output from the controller 56 and the position information of the image displayed on the display device 70.
- Whether or not there is a selection of the target image is determined depending on whether or not there is an image at a position where the electronic pen 40 is detected. For example, if there is an image at the position where the electronic pen 40 is detected, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S301 to Yes, and proceeds to step S302. On the other hand, if there is no image at the position where the electronic pen 40 is detected, or if there is no detection of the electronic pen 40, the CPU 59 determines No in step S301 and ends this flowchart.
- Step S302 is a process of moving the target image.
- the touch panel 71 detects the position of the moving electronic pen 40.
- the controller 56 acquires the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 based on the detection signal from the touch panel 71.
- Information on the position coordinates is input to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 outputs the target image information and the input position coordinate information to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 moves the position of the target image displayed on the display device 70 based on the information on the target image and the information on the position coordinates. Accordingly, when the electronic pen 40 that is in contact with or close to the touch panel 71 is moved, the target image moves in the same direction as the electronic pen 40 moves.
- Step S303 is processing for determining whether or not the image has moved to the edge of the screen.
- the CPU 59 acquires information on the size of the editing screen (positional coordinates of the four corners) displayed on the display device 70 and the size of the target image (positional coordinates of the four corners of the image). Further, as described above, position coordinate information is input from the controller 56. From these pieces of information, the CPU 59 determines whether or not the moving target image has reached the end of the editing screen. If the target image to be moved has reached the end of the editing screen, the CPU 59 determines that the target image has moved to the end of the screen. In this case, the determination result of step S303 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S304.
- step S303 determines that the target image has not moved to the end of the screen. In this case, the determination result of step S303 is No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S306.
- Step S304 is a process of permitting the display order to be changed. As illustrated in FIG. 17, when the target image is arranged so as to overlap with another image, such as a part of the image P1 is covered with another image P2, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S303 as Yes. By doing this, it is permitted to change the display order of the images. Then, the CPU 59 executes a process of replacing the display order information of the moving target image with the display order information of other images arranged so as to overlap the target image.
- Step S305 is processing for rearranging the target images.
- the movement of the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71, and the position coordinates at which the electronic pen 40 is detected are acquired by the controller 56.
- the CPU 59 outputs the position coordinate information acquired by the controller 56 and the target image information to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 displays the target image on the display device 70 in a state where the position of the target image has been moved based on the input position coordinate information.
- step S304 a process of switching the display order of the target image and the display order of other images is performed. By performing this process, when the target image is moved so that the target image and another image overlap each other, the target image is rearranged in a state where a part of the other image is covered.
- step S303 If it is determined in step S303 that the target image has not been moved to the screen edge, the process proceeds to step S306.
- Step S306 is a process for determining whether or not to stop changing the display order.
- the determination process in step S306 is executed based on the operation of the electronic pen 40. If the contact or proximity between the electronic pen 40 and the touch panel 71 is released before the target image is moved to the screen edge, the detection of the electronic pen 40 by the touch panel 71 ends.
- the CPU 59 executes the determination result of step S306 depending on whether or not position coordinate information is input from the controller 56 in a state where the target image has not reached the screen edge. For example, when the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 is not input, the CPU 59 determines that the change of the image display order is to be stopped. In this case, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S306 to Yes, and returns to step S301.
- the CPU 59 outputs a signal indicating that the target image is returned to the original position to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 moves the target image to the original position. Note that the target image may be held at the position where the detection of the electronic pen 40 is completed without being moved to the original position.
- step S306 sets the determination result in step S306 to No, and returns to step S303.
- the display order of the target image and other images can be switched by moving the target image to the edge of the editing screen.
- Step S401 is a process of moving the target image toward another image.
- the touch panel 71 detects the position of the moving electronic pen 40.
- the controller 56 acquires the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 based on the detection signal from the touch panel 71.
- Information on the position coordinates is input to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 outputs the target image information and the input position coordinate information to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 moves the position of the target image displayed on the display device 70 based on the information on the target image and the information on the position coordinates. Accordingly, when the electronic pen 40 that is in contact with or close to the touch panel 71 is moved, the target image moves in the same direction as the electronic pen 40 moves.
- Step S402 is processing for determining whether or not the target image has moved to the vicinity of another image.
- the CPU 59 refers to the position coordinate information output from the controller 56 and the position coordinates of another image to determine whether or not the target image has moved to the vicinity of the other image. For example, the CPU 59 calculates a distance from the center of the target pixel to the center of another image for each image. Then, the CPU 59 determines that the target image has moved to the vicinity of another image when any of the distances calculated for each image is equal to or less than the determination threshold value in step S402. When the target image has moved to the vicinity of another image, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S402. In this case, the process proceeds to step S403. On the other hand, when the target image has not moved to the vicinity of another image, the CPU 59 determines No in step S402. In this case, the process returns to step S401.
- Step S403 is processing for determining whether there are two images within a predetermined distance.
- the CPU 59 calculates the distance between the center of the target image and the center of another image for each image.
- the CPU 59 determines whether there are two or more images whose distance from the center of the target image is equal to or less than a threshold value. For example, when there are two images whose distance from the center of the target image is equal to or less than the threshold, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S403 to Yes, and proceeds to step S404.
- Step S404 is a process of changing the display order of the target images between the display orders of the two images.
- the CPU 59 refers to information related to the display order of two images close to the target image. Then, the CPU 59 changes the display order of each image so that the display order of the target image is located between the display orders of two images close to the target image. Based on this change in the display order, the moved target image is inserted between two adjacent images. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, when the image P5 is the target image, the display order of each image is changed so that the image P5 is inserted between the image P3 and the image P4, and the display is changed. The image P5 is arranged according to the order.
- step S403 if there are no two images within the predetermined distance, the CPU 59 sets the determination result of this step S403 to No, and proceeds to step S405.
- Step S405 is a process of changing the display order of the target image and the adjacent image.
- the CPU 59 identifies an image that falls within a predetermined range in the determination process in step S403.
- the CPU 59 refers to information on the display order of images close to the target image.
- the CPU 59 changes the display order of the target image and the display order of images close to the target image.
- the target image is moved by changing the display order of these images, the target image is inserted between two adjacent images.
- FIGS. 24 and 25 if the image P5 is close to the image P3, the display order of the image P5 and the display order of the image P3 are respectively changed. Therefore, the image P5 is arranged so that a part of the moved image P5 is covered with the image P3.
- the target image by moving the target image to the edge of the screen, it is allowed to change the display order of the images arranged in the screen, and the target image is changed to another image whose display order is changed. By bringing them closer, the display order of the target image and other images are automatically switched. According to this, for example, when a plurality of images are superimposed and combined, the display order of the images to be combined can be switched with a simple operation.
- various electronic information terminals such as mobile phones and tablet terminals capable of browsing texts and images are provided.
- an electronic information terminal when browsing an image or text, an image is switched or pages are turned by an input operation on a touch panel provided in the display unit.
- a device in which characters can be input by handwriting by an input operation on a touch panel using a pen-type pointing device see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-163193. By enabling such an input operation, the user can experience the operation of reading a book and writing characters and drawing using an electronic information terminal.
- the portable electronic information terminal of the present invention aims to experience actual operation on the terminal.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 of the present invention performs an operation (hereinafter referred to as a handwriting input operation) for performing handwriting input on a page displayed as an editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25.
- a handwriting input operation for performing handwriting input on a page displayed as an editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the operation of separating the page input by handwriting corresponds to the operation of breaking the page in an actual notebook.
- the input operation for separating the pages is executed when the content input by handwriting is transmitted to another user or when the content input by handwriting is deleted.
- the page displayed as the editing screen on the first display unit 25 is composed of an area A1 for performing a handwriting input operation using the electronic pen 40 and an area A2 for performing an input operation for separating the pages.
- the In the area A1 where the handwriting input operation is performed in addition to the handwriting input operation, an operation for arranging an image or an illustration image is possible.
- the electronic pen 40 is moved from the upper end of the first display unit 25 to the lower end (y direction in FIG. 29) or from the lower end of the first display unit 25. Only an input operation by moving the electronic pen 40 toward the upper end (-y direction in FIG. 29) can be performed.
- the area A2 where the input operation for separating pages is performed may be displayed on the first display unit 25 or may not be displayed.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display a perforation indicating a position where the page can be separated.
- a perforation 120 formed of a straight line along the y direction in FIG. 30A is displayed on the left end portion of the first display unit 25.
- the user may move the electronic pen 40 along the perforation 120 after bringing the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25 at the upper end or the lower end of the perforation 70.
- the number of perforations is not necessarily one, and two or more perforations can be displayed.
- the perforation is a straight line along the y direction in FIG. 30A, but is not limited to this, and may be a straight line along the x direction in FIG. 30B.
- the number of perforations 121 formed of straight lines extending in the x direction is not limited to one, and two or more perforations 121 may be provided.
- FIG. 31A when a user performs a handwriting input operation on the area A1 of the page displayed as the editing screen using the electronic pen 40, characters and sentences based on the handwriting input operation are edited. Displayed on the screen.
- the user brings the electronic pen 40 into contact with the upper end portion of the area A2 of the editing screen.
- the user moves the electronic pen 40 from the upper end portion of the first display unit 25 to the lower end portion (in the y direction in the figure).
- the first display unit 25 performs a moving image display showing a state of separating (breaking) the page.
- the separated page 125 is displayed on the first display unit 25 (see FIG. 31B).
- the electronic pen 40 is moved from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the area A2 on the editing screen.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and it is directed from the lower end portion to the upper end portion of the area A2 on the editing screen. Even if moved, the page can be separated in the same manner.
- a destination address list is displayed on the second display unit 28.
- the destination address list displayed on the second display unit 28 is desirably displayed automatically, but the user may display the address list using the electronic pen 40.
- the user uses the electronic pen 40 to select the intended partner's address.
- the first display unit 25 displays a moving image indicating that the separated page 125 is folded and sealed. Thereafter, the sealed page 125 is turned over and displayed as an envelope 126. At this time, the name and address of the other party as the transmission destination are attached to the envelope 126 (see FIG. 32).
- the operation of separating the page 125 is executed not only when the content input by handwriting is transmitted as an email but also when the content input by handwriting is deleted.
- the electronic pen 40 is brought into contact with the upper end of the area A2 of the page displayed on the first display unit 25 and moved toward the lower end of the area A2.
- the page in which characters and sentences are input by handwriting is separated, and the separated page 75 is displayed on the first display unit 25 (see FIG. 31B).
- the user uses the electronic pen 40 to display “ Enter "x” by handwriting. Based on the input operation of the electronic pen 40, for example, “x” is displayed on the separated page 125 (see FIG. 33B).
- the user brings the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25 and executes an operation of paying the electronic pen 40 in either the x direction or the ⁇ y direction in FIG.
- a moving image showing how the separated page 125 is discarded is displayed.
- a page that has not been handwritten is displayed on the first display unit 25 as an editing screen.
- step S501 to step S510 which will be described later, is processing for transmitting an email using the contents input by handwriting.
- Step S501 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation for separating pages.
- the controller 56 receives the detection signal from the touch panel 71 of the first display unit 25, and acquires information indicating the type of the display unit from which the detection signal is output, and coordinate data based on the detection signal. These pieces of information are output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59.
- step S501 determines that the operation is an input operation for separating pages. In this case, the determination result in step S501 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S502.
- step S501 determines that this is not an input operation for separating pages. In this case, the determination result of step S501 is No, and the flowchart of FIG. 34 ends.
- Step S502 is a process of displaying a moving image showing a state of separating pages.
- the CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image that shows how the page is cut off.
- the display control circuit 55 displays on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 a moving image based on the moving image data indicating how the page is cut off. Thereby, the moving image which shows a mode that the page is cut off is displayed on the first display unit 25.
- moving image data indicating a state of separating pages is stored in the data memory 61 in advance.
- Step S503 is a process for displaying the separated page.
- the CPU 59 outputs input data obtained by handwriting input operation of the electronic pen 40 to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the image data indicating the separated page on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the image data indicating the separated page and the input data. Thereby, the separated page is displayed. Note that image data indicating the separated page is stored in the data memory 61 in advance.
- Step S504 is a process of displaying an address list on the second display unit.
- the CPU 59 reads the address data stored in the built-in memory 60 and outputs it to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 refers to the address data and displays the address list on the display device 72 of the second display unit 28.
- Step S505 is processing for determining whether or not an input operation indicating address selection has been performed.
- the controller 56 receives a detection signal from the touch panel 73 of the second display unit 28, and acquires information indicating the type of the display unit from which the detection signal is output and coordinate data based on the detection signal. These pieces of information are output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59.
- step S505 determines whether it is coordinate data based on the detection signal of the touch panel 73 of the 2nd display part 28 from the information which shows the classification of a display part among the information output from the controller 56.
- the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S505 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to S506.
- the CPU 59 sets the determination result of step S505 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511.
- Step S506 is a process for generating transmission data.
- the CPU 59 acquires address data corresponding to the input coordinate data. Further, the CPU 59 generates transmission data by using the input data obtained during the handwriting input operation and the acquired address data.
- Step S507 is a process of displaying a moving image showing a state where the page is folded and sealed.
- the CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image.
- the CPU 59 outputs address data to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 displays the moving image based on the moving image data on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the moving image data and the address data indicating that the page is folded and sealed.
- Moving image data showing a state where the page is folded and sealed is stored in the data memory 61 in advance.
- Step S508 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation indicating transmission.
- the user when mail is transmitted, the user performs an operation of paying the electronic pen 40 in the ⁇ y direction in FIG. 32 after bringing the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25.
- a detection signal for detecting the electronic pen 40 is sequentially output from the touch panel 71 to the controller 56.
- the controller 56 outputs coordinate data based on the detection signals output sequentially to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 specifies the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 based on the input coordinate data. When the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 is the -y direction in FIG. 10, the CPU 59 determines that there is an input operation indicating transmission.
- step S508 the determination result of step S508 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S509.
- the CPU 59 determines that there is no input operation indicating transmission. . In this case, the process is repeatedly executed until the determination result in step S508 becomes Yes.
- Step S509 is processing for transmitting transmission data.
- the CPU 59 transmits transmission data via the communication unit 62.
- Step S510 is a process for displaying a moving image showing a state of sending an email.
- the CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image.
- the display control circuit 55 displays the moving image based on the moving image data on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the moving image data indicating a state of transmitting the mail. As a result, a moving image showing a state of transmitting the mail is displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the mail with the contents input by handwriting is transmitted to the portable electronic information terminal owned by the other party intended by the user.
- step S505 determines whether the determination result in step S505 described above is No. If the determination result in step S505 described above is No, the process proceeds to step S511. In addition, the process of step S511 to step S514 mentioned later becomes a process which deletes the content input by handwriting.
- Step S511 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation of “x” on the page.
- step S511 When a handwriting input operation using the electronic pen 40 is performed, input data based on the handwriting input operation is acquired.
- the CPU 59 determines whether or not the character by handwriting input to the first display unit 25 is “x” using the input data. If the character by handwriting input is “x”, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S511. In this case, the process proceeds to step S512. On the other hand, when the character by handwriting input is not "x", CPU59 makes the process of step S511 No and returns to step S505.
- Step S512 is a process for determining whether or not there is an input operation for deleting the contents input by handwriting.
- deleting the content input by handwriting after the user brings the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25, the user pays the electronic pen 40 in either the x direction or the y direction in FIG. Perform the action.
- a detection signal for detecting the electronic pen 40 is sequentially output from the touch panel 71 to the controller 56.
- the controller 56 outputs coordinate data based on the detection signals output sequentially to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 specifies the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 based on the input coordinate data.
- the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 is either the x direction or the y direction in FIG.
- step S512 determines that there is an input operation for deleting the contents input by handwriting. In this case, the determination result of step S512 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S513.
- the CPU 59 determines that there is no input operation for deleting the contents input by handwriting. In this case, the process is repeatedly executed until the determination result in step S512 becomes Yes.
- Step S513 is a process for deleting the input content.
- Input data obtained by handwriting input operation with the electronic pen 40 is stored in the built-in memory 60.
- the CPU 59 deletes input data stored in the built-in memory 60.
- Step S514 is a process of displaying a moving image showing a state of discarding the page.
- the CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image.
- the display control circuit 55 displays the moving image based on the moving image data on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the moving image data indicating that the page is discarded. Accordingly, a moving image for discarding the page is displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 receives a mail
- the envelope 126 is displayed on the first display unit 25.
- a moving image display for opening the envelope 126 is performed, and the opened page is displayed (not shown). ). This display makes it possible to read the received mail.
- the portable electronic information terminal 10 of the present embodiment when the content input by handwriting is transmitted to the portable electronic information terminal owned by another user, or when the content input by handwriting is deleted.
- an operation of separating a page input by handwriting by an input operation of the electronic pen 40 is performed.
- the operation described above is performed electronically because the target page is broken from the notebook.
- transmission data based on the contents input by handwriting is transmitted to the target destination.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and transmission data based on handwritten input content may be automatically transmitted when an input operation for selecting a destination address from an address list is performed.
- the operation of paying in the x direction or the y direction with the electronic pen 40 is performed, and the case where the content input by handwriting is deleted is taken as an example. It is not necessary to be limited to this, and when the operation of paying in the x direction or the y direction with the electronic pen 40 is performed without inputting “x” by hand on a separated page, the content input by handwriting is deleted. Also good. In addition to this, the handwritten input content may be deleted by handwriting “x” on the separated page.
- the content written on the page is sent as an email to another portable electronic information terminal, or the content written on the page
- the same processing can be performed even when a notepad, a tag, or the like is displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the position for separating the page is set in advance.
- the position where the page can be separated is set in advance. There is no need. By not setting the position where the page can be separated in advance, it is possible to transmit the contents written down at the edge of the page to other users.
- a general stylus pen is taken as an example of the electronic pen used in the input operation to the portable electronic information terminal 10 and explained.
- a touch panel is mounted on an electronic information terminal such as a mobile phone or a tablet terminal.
- an electronic information terminal such as a mobile phone or a tablet terminal.
- an input operation can be performed using a pen-type pointing device called a stylus pen.
- the pen-type pointing device will be described as an electronic pen.
- the colors set in the selection palette and the colors that can be selected with the electronic pen are often preset colors or colors set by changing the numerical values of the R, G, and B colors. Illustration drawing is suitable for drawing using such preset colors, but is not suitable for drawing using colors generated by mixing a plurality of colors, such as watercolor paintings and oil paintings.
- transmission / reception of data between the electronic pen and the portable electronic information terminal is executed between the communication unit of the portable electronic information terminal and a wireless communication unit described later.
- the electronic pen 130 is a pen-type pointing device, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type electronic pen is used.
- the electronic pen 130 includes an input switch 131 at one end in the longitudinal direction and a color acquisition button 132 at the other end.
- the input switch 131 is in contact with or close to a display unit (the first display unit 25 or the second display unit 28) provided in the apparatus body 15 when performing an input operation to the portable electronic information terminal 10.
- a display unit the first display unit 25 or the second display unit 28
- an electromagnetic wave generated by an electromagnetic coil provided in the vicinity of the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is detected by a digitizer (in this embodiment, a touch panel) provided in the display unit, whereby the electronic pen 130 is detected.
- the position of the input switch 131 and the tilt of the electronic pen 130 are detected.
- the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 when an input operation is performed using the electronic pen 130, if the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is pressed against the display unit, pressure is applied to the input switch 131.
- the inductance of the built-in electromagnetic coil changes, and the strength of the electromagnetic wave generated by the electromagnetic coil changes. Based on the change in the intensity of the electromagnetic wave, the writing pressure of the electronic pen 130 to be input can be detected.
- the color acquisition button 132 is operated when acquiring color information of illustrations, images, and characters displayed on the first display unit 25 when drawing on the first display unit 25. Specifically, the color acquisition button 132 is operated in a state where the input switch 131 is in contact with the first display unit 25, and the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 corresponding to the position where the input switch 131 is in contact. The color information of the pixel is acquired.
- the function of acquiring color information displayed on the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10 is referred to as a dropper function.
- the electronic pen 130 includes a mode switching button 133, a selection / storage button 134, and a color display area 135 in addition to the input switch 131 and the color acquisition button 132 described above.
- the mode switching button 133 switches a mode to be used between the single color mode and the mixed color mode.
- the single color mode is a mode in which color information newly acquired by the above-described dropper function is set as color information used for drawing.
- the color mixture mode is based on the color based on the already acquired color information and the newly acquired color information when the color information is already acquired with the dropper function when the color information is already acquired. In this mode, color information when color is mixed is generated, and the generated color information is set as color information used for drawing.
- the color mixture based on the color information based on the already acquired color information and the color based on the newly acquired color information is executed by subtractive color mixing.
- the selection / storage button 134 is operated when storing color information acquired using the dropper function or when drawing using the stored color information.
- FIG. 5 shows a case where three color storage buttons 134 a, 134 b, and 134 c are provided as the selection / storage button 134. That is, in the case of the electronic pen 130 of FIG. 35, it is possible to store a maximum of three pieces of color information acquired using the dropper function or three pieces of color information generated in the color mixture mode.
- the number of selection / storage buttons 134 need not be limited to three, but may be one or two, or four or more.
- these selection / storage buttons 134 include a display unit, and the display unit displays colors.
- the color displayed on the display unit is a color based on the color information associated with each selection / storage button 134 among the color information acquired using the dropper function. By displaying these colors, the user can visually recognize the color information stored in association with each selection / storage button 134. When the selection / storage button 134 does not emit light, it indicates that the color information is not associated and stored.
- the color display area 135 displays the color used when drawing on the first display unit 25 and the color acquired by the dropper function.
- the portion corresponding to the color display area 135 of the electronic pen 130 is made of, for example, a translucent or transparent synthetic resin.
- the display in the color display area 135 is changed from the color display based on the already obtained color information to the color display based on the newly acquired color information.
- the display of the color display area 135 is newly acquired from the color display based on the already obtained color information and the displayed color.
- the display is switched to a color display that is a mixture of colors based on the color information.
- FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the electronic pen.
- the electronic pen 130 includes a controller 141, and each unit is controlled by the controller 141.
- the controller 141 receives ON signals from the color acquisition switch 142, the mode changeover switch 143, and the selection switch 145, and the controller 141 executes processing according to the ON signals from these switches.
- the power source for supplying power is omitted.
- the color acquisition switch 142 is provided inside the color acquisition button 132.
- the color acquisition switch 142 is turned on when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, and an ON signal is output to the controller 141.
- the controller 141 is brought into contact with the first display unit 25 among the pixels of the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 from the portable electronic information terminal 10 via the wireless communication unit 155.
- the color information of the pixel corresponding to the position of the input switch 131 is acquired.
- the mode change switch 143 is provided inside the mode change button 133 described above.
- the mode switch 143 is turned on when the mode switch button 133 is operated, and an on signal is output to the controller 141. In response to this, the controller 141 switches between the single color mode and the mixed color mode.
- selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c are constituted by push-on / push-off type operation buttons. Since the configuration of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c is the same, only the configuration of the selection / storage button 134a will be described below.
- the selection / storage button 134a includes a selection switch 145, a driver 146, and an LED 147.
- the selection switch 145 is turned on by the push-on operation of the selection / storage button 134a and turned off by the push-off operation. Based on the push-on operation of the selection / storage button 134 a, the selection switch 145 is turned on and an on signal is output to the controller 141.
- the controller 141 reads out color information corresponding to the selection / storage button 134a and information such as the pulse width and period of each color component based on the color information from the data storage unit 152. . Then, the controller 141 outputs information such as the pulse width and cycle of each color component to the driver 146.
- the driver 146 causes the LED 147 to emit light based on the input information.
- the LED 147 is a full-color LED in which three primary colors of R, B, and G are combined.
- the driver 150 and the LED 151 are arranged inside the color display area 135 described above. Similar to the LED 147 built in the selection / storage button 134, the LED 151 is composed of a full-color LED in which three primary colors of R color, B color, and G color are combined. Note that FIG. 36 shows an example in which three LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are arranged so that the level of the displayed color (remaining amount, ratio, etc.) can be expressed.
- the data storage unit 152 stores color information obtained from the portable electronic information terminal 10 or color information obtained by mixing colors based on a plurality of color information. The color information is stored in association with one of the selection / storage buttons 134. In addition to the color sample data 153, the data storage unit 152 stores control data (pulse width, period, etc.) 154 for causing each color registered in the color sample data 153 to emit light.
- control data pulse width, period, etc.
- the wireless communication unit 155 transmits / receives data to / from the communication unit 62 provided in the portable electronic information terminal 10.
- the wireless communication unit 155 communicates with the portable electronic information terminal 10 by wireless communication, for example, wireless communication using a wireless LAN, infrared communication, or wireless communication using Bluetooth (registered trademark). Send and receive data.
- the controller 141 described above has functions such as a ratio setting unit 156 and a color generation unit 157 when the color mixture mode is selected.
- the ratio setting unit 156 sets a ratio for mixing colors based on color information acquired before and after the time in the color mixture mode. As described above, when the color information is acquired using the dropper function, it is necessary to operate the color acquisition button 132.
- the ratio setting unit 156 is acquired based on the time when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the number of times the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, and the like. The color capacity for each color information is calculated.
- the ratio setting unit 156 sets a ratio when colors based on the plurality of pieces of color information are mixed from the color capacity obtained for each of the plurality of pieces of color information.
- the ratio setting unit 156 includes a counter that counts the number of times the color acquisition switch 142 is turned on, and a timer that measures a duration when the color acquisition switch 142 is kept on.
- the pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated may be output from a pressure sensor (not shown).
- the color generation unit 157 generates color information when the color based on the already acquired color information and the color based on the newly acquired color information are mixed using the ratio obtained by the ratio setting unit 156 To do. Based on the generated color information, the controller 141 controls the light emission of the LED 147 of the corresponding selection / storage button 134 and the LED 151 of the color display area 135. When storing the mixed color information, the controller 141 writes the generated color information and the selection / storage button 134 that is turned on in association with each other into the data storage unit 152.
- Step S601 is a process of determining whether any of the selection switches is turned on. If an ON signal is input from any of the selection switches 145 provided for each selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S601 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S602. On the other hand, if there is no ON signal input from any of the selection switches 145 provided for each selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S601 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S604.
- Step S602 is processing for determining whether or not there is color information. If the determination result in step S601 is Yes, step S602 is executed. The controller 141 determines whether the selection switch 145 that outputs the ON signal is the selection switch 145 provided in any of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c. Then, the controller 141 refers to the data storage unit 152 and determines whether or not the color information associated with the specified selection / storage button 134 is stored. If there is color information associated with the selected selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S602 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S603. On the other hand, if there is no color information associated with the specified selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S602 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S604.
- Step S603 is a process for displaying a color.
- the process of step S603 is executed.
- the controller 141 reads out color information associated with the selection / storage button 134 from the data storage unit 152.
- the controller 141 reads the color sample table 153 and the control data 154 stored in the data storage unit 152 and outputs control data based on the color information to the driver 150.
- the driver 150 controls the light emission of the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c.
- the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c the color stored in association with the operated selection / storage button 134 is displayed in the color display area 135.
- step S602 if there is no color information associated with the specified selection / storing button 134, the above-described processing in step S603 is not executed, so that the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are not emitted, and color display is performed. Color display is not performed in area 135.
- Step S604 is processing for determining whether or not a color information request signal has been received. For example, when an input operation is performed on the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10 using the electronic pen 130, the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is brought into contact with the first display unit 25. As described above, the first display unit 25 includes the touch panel 71 and detects that the input switch 131 is in contact. By detecting that the input switch 131 is in contact, a request signal for color information is transmitted from the portable electronic information terminal 10 to the electronic pen 130. The controller 141 determines whether or not a color information request signal has been received via the wireless communication unit 155. When the color information request signal is received, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S604 to Yes, and proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, if the color information request signal has not been received, the controller 141 determines No in step S604 and proceeds to step S607.
- Step S605 is processing for determining whether or not there is color information.
- the controller 141 determines whether or not color display is being performed in the color display area 135. For example, when displaying a color in the color display area 135, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S605 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S606. On the other hand, if no color is displayed in the color display area 135, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S605 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S607.
- Step S606 is a process of transmitting color information.
- the controller 141 reads color information based on the color displayed in the color display area 135 from the data storage unit 152.
- the controller 141 transmits the color information to the portable electronic information terminal 10 through the wireless communication unit 155. Accordingly, when the electronic pen 130 is used to draw on the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10, a straight line or a curve using the color set by the electronic pen 130 can be drawn. It becomes possible.
- Step S607 is processing for determining whether or not the color acquisition switch is turned on.
- the color information displayed on the first display surface 25 can be acquired by the dropper function.
- the color acquisition button 132 When the color acquisition button 132 is operated by the user, the color acquisition switch 142 provided inside the color acquisition button 132 is turned on, and the ON signal is output to the controller 141.
- the controller 141 determines whether or not the ON signal from the color acquisition switch 142 is input. For example, when an ON signal is input from the color acquisition switch 142, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S607 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S608. On the other hand, when the ON signal from the color acquisition switch 142 is not input, the controller 141 determines No in step S607. In this case, the process proceeds to step S617.
- Step S608 is processing for transmitting a request signal for color information.
- the controller 141 outputs a color information request signal to the portable electronic information terminal 10 via the wireless communication unit 155.
- Step S609 is processing for determining whether or not color information is received. For example, when the above-described color acquisition switch 142 is turned on while the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is in contact with the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10, the portable electronic information is transferred from the electronic pen 130. A color information request signal is output to the terminal 10. In response to the color information request signal, the portable electronic information terminal 10 acquires the color information of the pixel corresponding to the coordinate data with which the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is abutted. Then, the acquired color information is transmitted to the electronic pen 130.
- step S609 The color information transmitted from the portable electronic information terminal 10 is received by the wireless communication unit 155 of the electronic pen 130.
- the controller 141 determines Yes in step S609, and proceeds to step S610.
- the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S609 to No. In this case, the determination process of step S609 is repeatedly performed until the determination result of step S609 becomes Yes.
- Step S610 is processing for determining whether or not the mode is the single color mode.
- the electronic pen 130 can be switched between the single color mode and the mixed color mode by operating the mode switching button 133.
- the controller 141 reads out the mode information of the electronic pen 130 stored in the data storage unit 152 and determines whether or not the mode is the single color mode. If the mode information is information indicating a single color mode, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S610 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S611. On the other hand, if the mode information is information indicating the color mixture mode, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S610 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S614.
- step S610 If the electronic pen 130 is set to the single color mode, the determination result of step S610 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S611.
- Step S611 is processing for determining whether or not a color is displayed in the color display area.
- the controller 141 executes the determination process in step S611 depending on whether or not the LED 151 is emitting light. That is, when the LED 151 is caused to emit light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S611 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S612. On the other hand, if the LED 151 is not emitting light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S611 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S613.
- Step S612 is a process for changing the color display.
- the controller 141 changes the color displayed in the color display area 135 from the color based on the previously acquired color information.
- a process of switching to a color based on information is executed.
- the controller 141 reads control data based on the newly acquired color information from the data storage unit 152.
- control data based on the newly acquired color information is output to the driver 150.
- the driver 150 controls the light emission of the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c using the newly input control data.
- the color displayed in the color display area 135 is changed.
- Step S613 is a process for displaying a color.
- Step S613 is processing performed when color display is not executed in the color display area 135.
- the controller 141 reads out control data 154 corresponding to the acquired color information from the data storage unit 152. Then, the control data 154 based on the acquired color information is output to the driver 150. In response to this, the driver 150 controls the light emission of the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c using the input control data 154. As a result, the acquired color is displayed in the color display area 135.
- step S610 that is, if the electronic pen 130 is set to the color mixture mode, the process proceeds to step S614.
- Step S614 is processing for determining whether or not a color is displayed in the color display area.
- the controller 141 executes the determination process in step S614 depending on whether the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are emitting light. That is, when the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are caused to emit light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S614 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S615. On the other hand, if the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are not emitting light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S614 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S616.
- Step S615 is processing for generating color information.
- the electronic pen 130 is set to the color mixture mode.
- the controller 141 obtains a ratio when the color based on the previously obtained color information is mixed with the color based on the newly acquired color information. Specifically, the controller 141 sets a ratio for mixing colors based on color information acquired before and after in time. The controller 141 acquires a plurality of colors acquired based on the time when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the number of times the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, and the like. Calculate the color capacity for each piece of information.
- the ratio setting unit 156 in the controller 141 sets a ratio when colors based on the plurality of pieces of color information are mixed from the color capacities obtained for each of the plurality of pieces of color information.
- the color generation unit 157 in the controller 141 generates color information of mixed colors obtained by mixing the color based on the color information already obtained using the obtained ratio and the color based on the newly acquired color information.
- Step S616 is a process for displaying a color.
- the controller 141 reads the control data 154 corresponding to the color information generated in step S615 from the data storage unit 152, and sends it to the driver 150. Output. If the determination result in step S614 is No, the controller 141 reads the control data 154 associated with the newly acquired color information from the data storage unit 152 and outputs the control data 154 to the driver 150. The driver 150 displays the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c based on the input control data. As a result, color display is executed in the color display area 135.
- Step S617 is processing for determining whether any of the selection switches is on. As described above, when the selection / storage button 134 is pushed on, the selection switch 145 is turned on and an on signal is output to the controller 141. The controller 141 determines whether an ON signal is output from any of the selection switches 145 of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c. If an ON signal is output from any of the selection switches 145 of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S617 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S618.
- step S618 when the ON signal is not output from any of the selection switches 145 of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c, the controller 141 sets the determination result of step S618 to No. In this case, the processing flow of the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, if the determination result in step S617 is No, the color information displayed in the color display area 135 is not stored.
- Step S618 is processing for storing color information.
- the controller 141 stores the selection / storage button 134 in which the selection switch 145 for outputting the ON signal is built in and the color information in association with each other in the data storage unit 152.
- Step S619 is a process of changing the color display.
- the controller 141 refers to the control data 154 stored in the data storage unit 152 and causes the LED 147 incorporated in the selection / storage button 134 associated with the color information to be stored to emit light. As a result, the color display of the push-on selection / storage button 134 is changed.
- the color display based on the previously obtained color information is changed to the newly acquired color information. Switch to the color display based on. Further, when the dropper function is used in a state where the color information is not acquired, a color is displayed based on the newly acquired color information.
- the color based on the color information and the color based on the color information newly acquired using the dropper function are mixed to newly Color information is generated, and a color based on the generated color information is displayed in the color display area 135.
- information on the colors used for the illustrations and characters displayed on the first display unit 25 is acquired by the electronic pen 130, and the acquired colors are used as they are or a plurality of acquired colors are mixed.
- color information when colors based on these color information are mixed is generated, so that a feeling of drawing while actually mixing paints is obtained. It becomes possible.
- Step S701 is processing for determining whether or not there is detection by the touch panel.
- the first display unit 25 includes the touch panel 71, and when the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is brought into contact with the touch panel 71, a detection signal is output from the touch panel 71 toward the controller 56.
- the controller 56 outputs coordinate data based on the detection signal of the touch panel 71 to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 determines whether or not there is a detection by the touch panel 71 based on whether or not coordinate data is output from the controller 56. For example, if there is a coordinate signal output from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines that there is detection by the touch panel 71, and the process proceeds to step S702. On the other hand, for example, when there is no output of coordinate data from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines that there is no detection by the touch panel 71, and proceeds to step S710.
- Step S702 is a process of transmitting a color information request signal.
- the CPU 59 transmits a color information request signal via the communication unit 62.
- Step S703 is processing for determining whether or not color information is received. If the color information transmitted from the electronic pen 130 is received by the communication unit 62, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S703. On the other hand, when the color information transmitted from the electronic pen 130 is not received by the communication unit 62, the CPU 59 sets the determination result of step S703 to No. In this case, the determination process of step S203 is repeatedly executed until the determination result of step S703 becomes Yes.
- Step S704 is processing for setting color information at the time of drawing.
- the CPU 59 sets the color information received from the electronic pen 130 as color information when drawing (illustrations, characters) executed on the editing screen.
- Step S705 is processing for determining whether or not the position detected by the touch panel has changed.
- the CPU 59 refers to the coordinate data output from the controller 56 and determines whether or not the position detected by the touch panel 71 has changed. If the position detected by the touch panel 71 has changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S705 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the position detected by the touch panel 71 has not changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S705 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S708.
- Step S706 is a drawing process.
- the CPU 59 outputs the coordinate data output from the controller 56 and the set color information to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 obtains a movement locus from the coordinate signal output from the controller 56, and displays the obtained movement locus so as to be superimposed on the editing image that is the basis of the editing screen. At this time, the obtained movement locus is displayed in a color based on the set color information. That is, by performing the process of step S706, the movement locus based on the movement of the electronic pen 130 is displayed in the color set by the electronic pen 130. Thereby, a character, an illustration, etc. are drawn.
- Step S707 is processing for determining whether there is detection by the touch panel.
- the detection by the touch panel 71 is released. That is, the output of coordinate data from the controller 56 to the CPU 59 is stopped.
- the CPU 59 determines whether there is no detection by the touch panel 71 based on whether or not the output of the coordinate data is stopped. For example, when the output of the coordinate data is stopped, the controller 56 determines that there is no detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the determination result of step S707 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S710.
- step S707 determines that the touch panel 71 has detected the coordinate data. In this case, the determination result of step S707 is No, and the process proceeds to step S705.
- step S705 If the determination result of step S705 is No, the process proceeds to step S708.
- Step S708 is a process for determining whether or not a color information request signal has been received.
- the color acquisition button 132 by the electronic pen 130 is operated, the color acquisition switch 142 is turned on, and a request signal for color information is transmitted from the electronic pen 130.
- the CPU 59 determines whether or not the color information request signal is received by the communication unit 62. If the color information request signal is received by the communication unit 62, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S708 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S709.
- step S708 the determination result in step S708 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S710.
- Step S709 is a process of transmitting color information.
- the CPU 59 outputs the coordinate data output from the controller 56 to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 acquires the color information of the pixel of the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 corresponding to the coordinate data, and outputs it to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 outputs the acquired color information to the communication unit 62.
- the communication unit 62 transmits the color information to the electronic pen 130.
- Step S710 is processing for determining whether or not to end the editing screen. For example, if the input operation of the electronic pen 130 indicates screen switching instead of drawing, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S710. In this case, the flow of the flowchart of FIG. 38 ends. On the other hand, for example, if the input operation of the electronic pen 130 performs drawing, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S710 to No. In this case, the process returns to step S701.
- color information is acquired from the electronic pen 130, and processing based on the drawing is executed. Further, when the color is acquired by the electronic pen 130, the color information of the pixel on the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25 is transmitted to the electronic pen 130. By this transmission, the color used when drawing on the electronic pen 130 side is set. That is, in the portable electronic information terminal 10, there is no need to display a color palette, so that it is possible to widen the space for the user to draw on the editing screen.
- the color palette may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, display / non-display of the color palette may be switched. In this case, for example, a tab for a color palette is displayed on the outer peripheral edge of the first display unit 25. Then, the color palette may be displayed by performing an operation of pulling out the tab with the electronic pen 130, and the color palette may be hidden by performing an operation of pushing the tab with the electronic pen 130.
- the operation for switching the display / non-display of the color palette is not limited to the above, and a button for switching the display / non-display of the color palette may be provided. In this way, by switching between display and non-display of the color palette, it is possible to cope with a case where there is no color intended by the user among colors used for illustrations, characters, etc. displayed on the first display unit 25. It becomes.
- a plurality of LEDs 151 are arranged inside a color display area 135 made of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display, etc. It is also possible to display colors using a display device.
- a display device By using such a display device, it is possible to display a state in which the color based on the color information acquired using the dropper function and the color based on the already acquired color information are mixed.
- a program and data for displaying a moving image showing how the newly acquired color is mixed with the already acquired color may be stored in the data storage unit.
- a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display
- the color mixture mode it is possible to display a color based on the already acquired color information in advance and display an image that is gradually mixed when a dropper function is newly used.
- the display may be switched to the color display based on the acquired color information or the color display based on the generated color information, as in the present embodiment.
- the color based on the color information obtained when the dropper function is used and the color based on the color information mixed by the dropper function are displayed in the entire color display area.
- the capacity of the acquired color is simulated based on the operation time of the color acquisition button 132 when the dropper function is used, the number of operations of the color acquisition button 132, or the pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated. It is also possible to determine the number of LEDs that emit light according to the obtained capacity. Such a process can be applied in the single color mode or the mixed color mode.
- the time of sliding contact with the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 and the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10 at the time of drawing is measured, and the number of LEDs that emit light is determined according to the measured time. It can be reduced. That is, in the color display area, the display of the remaining amount of the acquired color information can be displayed in a pseudo manner.
- the color acquisition button 132 is operated to switch to the color display based on the newly obtained color information, and in the mixed color mode, the color information is acquired every time using the dropper function.
- the color mixed with is displayed.
- a reset button is displayed on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 or the color information stored in the electronic pen 130 is initialized so that colors can be mixed with colors intended by the user.
- a reset button may be provided.
- the electronic pen 130 has both the single color mode and the mixed color mode is described.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and either the single color mode or the mixed color mode is used. It may be an electronic pen equipped with.
- the eyedropper function of the electronic pen 130 is enabled for the first display unit 25, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the color used for the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28. It is also possible to acquire the information.
- the portable electronic information terminal shown in the present embodiment has been described on the premise of an input operation using an electronic pen made of a slitus pen, but in addition to this, an input operation with a user's finger can also be accepted.
- the user may be able to extract an intended color with a finger or using a general electronic pen.
- a processing command is displayed on the first display unit 25 in advance, and after the processing command is selected, the color intended by the user is displayed.
- a method of performing an operation of abutting a finger or the electronic pen 40 on a region that is present, or a method of performing a predetermined operation (for example, continuously abutting twice) on a region where an intended color is displayed with the finger or the electronic pen 40 Can be mentioned.
- FIG. 39 (a) an example will be described in which the user extracts a color at a predetermined position in the image P6 when the image P6 is displayed on the first display unit 25.
- the user's finger is brought into contact with the portion where the color intended by the user is displayed.
- the position indicated by reference numeral 170 is the position where the user's finger abuts.
- the finger is brought into contact with the peripheral region (hatched region 171 shown in FIG. 39A) at the contacted position. It is displayed in the color of the position.
- abutted is displayed with the color of the position which the finger contact
- drawing includes writing characters in addition to drawing illustrations and drawings.
- Step S801 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation for performing color extraction.
- the touched position is detected by the touch panel 71 of the first display unit 25.
- the detected position information is output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59.
- the CPU 59 determines whether or not the input operation is an input operation for performing color extraction.
- step S801 when a control command is displayed, if the position information output from the controller 56 is within the area where the control command for color extraction displayed on the first display unit 25 is displayed, color extraction is performed. It is determined that the input operation to be performed has been performed. In this case, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S801 to Yes, and proceeds to step S802. On the other hand, when the position information output from the controller 56 is outside the area where the color extraction control command displayed on the first display unit 25 is displayed, it is determined that the input operation for performing color extraction has not been performed. . In this case, the CPU 59 determines No in step S801 and proceeds to step S806.
- step S801 may be determined based on whether or not the position information output from the controller 56 has been continuously output a plurality of times.
- Step S802 is processing for extracting color information.
- the CPU 59 outputs a signal for obtaining the color information to the display control circuit 55 together with the position information output from the controller 56.
- the display control circuit 55 acquires pixel color information based on the input position information from the image displayed on the first display unit 25. Thereby, the color information of the position where the input operation is performed is extracted.
- Step S803 is a process for displaying the extracted color information.
- the display control circuit 55 synthesizes the color information of the pixels included in the predetermined range area with respect to the input position information and the extracted color information. In this case, it is only necessary to display the extracted color information much, so it is necessary to synthesize the extracted color information as it is with the color information (R, G, B values, etc.) of the pixels included in the predetermined range of area. Rather, a value obtained by multiplying the extracted color information (R, G, B values) by a predetermined coefficient ⁇ (0 ⁇ ⁇ 1) is used as the color information (R, G) of the pixels included in the region of the predetermined range. , B value, etc.). Also, the color information of the pixels included in the predetermined range area is specified by the finger without combining the color information of the pixels included in the predetermined range area with respect to the input position information and the extracted color information. It may be replaced with position color information.
- Step S804 is a process for determining whether or not the position of the input operation has been moved. Since the position where the user's finger or the electronic pen 40 abuts is detected by the touch panel 71, when the user's finger or the electronic pen 40 slides, the position of the abutting user's finger or the electronic pen 40 is sequentially changed to the controller. 56 to the CPU 59. In response to this, the CPU 59 determines whether or not the input position information has changed. If the position information has changed, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S804. In this case, the process proceeds to step S805. On the other hand, if the position information has not changed, the CPU 59 determines No in step S804. In this case, the process proceeds to step S806.
- Step S805 is processing to move the display position of the color information.
- the CPU 59 outputs the position information output from the controller 56 to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 moves the area (the above-described predetermined area) where the extracted color information is displayed based on the input position information.
- the extracted color information and the color information of the pixels included in the moved predetermined range area are synthesized.
- the display control circuit 55 displays the target pixel using the synthesized color information.
- Step S806 is processing to determine whether or not there is a drawing input operation.
- step S806 When it is determined from the position information input from the controller 56 to the CPU 59 that the user's finger or electronic pen 40 input operation is an input operation based on drawing, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S806 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S807. On the other hand, when the input operation of the finger or the electronic pen 40 by the user cannot be determined as the input operation based on the drawing, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S806 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S808.
- Step S807 is processing for displaying a drawing based on the input operation.
- the CPU 59 if the input operation is based on drawing, the CPU 59 outputs position information input based on the input operation and a signal indicating the type of drawing to the display control circuit 55.
- the display control circuit 55 executes a drawing process based on the input signal and information. At this time, if there is extracted color information, the display control circuit 55 performs drawing processing using the color information. As a result, a drawing that matches the locus of the input operation based on the finger or the electronic pen 40 is displayed on the first display unit 25.
- Step S808 is processing for determining whether or not to end the drawing input operation. Based on the position information output from the controller 56 based on the input operation of the user's finger or the electronic pen 40, the CPU 59 determines whether or not the drawing input operation has ended. If the CPU 59 can determine from the position information output from the controller 56 that the drawing input operation is completed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S808 to Yes. In this case, the process of the flowchart shown in FIG. 40 ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 59 cannot determine when the drawing input operation is completed, the CPU 59 determines No in step S808. In this case, the process returns to step S801.
- color extraction processing can be performed by operating the finger or the electronic pen 40, and drawing can be performed using the extracted color information.
- a portable electronic information terminal comprising two display units, the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28, is taken as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and one display is possible. It may be a portable electronic information terminal comprising parts.
- the electronic pen 130 that performs an input operation on the portable electronic information terminal 10 is taken as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- drawing is performed using a computer or the like. It can be used for a pen-type pointing device to be used.
- the portable electronic information terminal and the electronic pen used in the portable electronic information terminal are described as examples.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the computer and the computer It is good also as a pointing device used for it.
- the image editing process in the portable electronic information terminal is described.
- the image editing program can be executed by a computer. That is, the procedure of the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 and 15, the procedure of the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 to 28, the procedure of the flowchart of FIG. 34, the procedure of the flowchart of FIG. 38, and the procedure of the flowchart of FIG. It may be a computer-readable image editing program that can be executed by a computer.
- the image editing program is preferably stored in a computer-readable storage medium such as a memory card, an optical disk, or a magnetic disk.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
- Controls And Circuits For Display Device (AREA)
Abstract
This image editing device is characterized by being provided with: a display unit having a display region on which an image is displayed; a setting unit for setting a control point on the image displayed on the display region of the display unit when manipulating the image; a resetting unit for resetting the control point on a portion of a region on the image displayed on the display region when the size of the image displayed on the display unit is larger than the size of the display region; and a display control unit for displaying the image on the display region and for displaying the control point set by means of the setting unit or the control point reset by means of the resetting unit in accordance with the state in which the image is displayed.
Description
本発明は、画像編集装置、画像編集プログラム、電子情報端末機、ポインティングデバイス及び入力システムに関する。
The present invention relates to an image editing apparatus, an image editing program, an electronic information terminal, a pointing device, and an input system.
一般に、編集画面に表示される画像の表示倍率を変化させる、或いは表示される画像を回転させながら、画像を加工する画像編集装置が提供されている。このような画像編集装置においては、編集画面に設けられた拡大、縮小ボタンや回転ボタンを操作して、画像を意図する表示倍率に拡大/縮小させる、或いは画像を回転させるものや、画像周縁部に設けられた制御ポイントにポインタを当接させた状態でドラッグすることで、画像を拡大/縮小させる、又は回転させるものがある。この制御ポイントを用いた場合、画像の一部が編集画面からはみ出たときには、画像の周縁部に設けられた制御ポイントも編集画面からはみ出てしまうという欠点がある。このため、画像にグリッドを重畳表示させ、表示されるグリッドにポインタを当接させた状態で所定方向にドラッグすることにより、画像を拡大/縮小させる、又は画像を回転させるものも提案されている(特許文献1参照)。
Generally, there is provided an image editing apparatus that processes an image while changing the display magnification of the image displayed on the editing screen or rotating the displayed image. In such an image editing apparatus, an enlargement / reduction button or a rotation button provided on the editing screen is operated to enlarge / reduce the image to an intended display magnification, or to rotate the image, In some cases, the image is enlarged / reduced or rotated by dragging the pointer with the control point provided on the screen. When this control point is used, when a part of the image protrudes from the editing screen, the control point provided at the peripheral edge of the image also protrudes from the editing screen. For this reason, there has been proposed a method in which a grid is superimposed on an image and the image is enlarged / reduced or rotated by dragging in a predetermined direction with the pointer in contact with the displayed grid. (See Patent Document 1).
このように、グリッドを表示する場合、画像の一部が編集画面からはみ出したとしても、編集画面においてグリッドが表示されることから、グリッドを用いた画像の拡大や縮小、回転などの操作を行うことができるが、編集画面上にグリッドを表示することは一般的でない。このため、画像全体が編集画面内で表示することができる場合に制御ポイントを用い、画像の一部が編集画面からはみ出る場合にグリッドを表示させることも考えられるが、編集画面に表示される画像の大きさや、編集画面における画像の位置、回転角度によって、同一機能に対する入力操作を変更することは、操作上好ましくない。
In this way, when displaying a grid, even if part of the image protrudes from the editing screen, the grid is displayed on the editing screen, so operations such as enlarging, reducing, and rotating the image using the grid are performed. Although it is possible to display a grid on the editing screen, it is not common. For this reason, it is possible to use a control point when the entire image can be displayed in the editing screen, and to display a grid when a part of the image protrudes from the editing screen. It is not preferable in terms of operation to change the input operation for the same function depending on the size of the image, the position of the image on the editing screen, and the rotation angle.
本発明は、画像の状態に関わらず、一般的な操作で画像編集を行うことができるようにした画像編集装置及び画像編集プログラムを提供することを目的とする。
It is an object of the present invention to provide an image editing apparatus and an image editing program that can perform image editing by a general operation regardless of the state of the image.
上述した課題を解決するために、本発明の画像編集装置は、画像を表示する表示領域を備えた表示部と、前記表示部の前記表示領域内に表示される前記画像に対して、前記画像を操作する際の制御ポイントを設定する設定部と、前記表示部に表示される画像の大きさが前記表示領域の大きさよりも大きいときに、前記表示領域に表示される当該画像の一部領域に対して前記制御ポイントを再設定する再設定部と、前記表示領域に前記画像を表示するとともに、前記画像の表示状態に応じて、前記設定部により設定される前記制御ポイント、又は前記再設定部により再設定される前記制御ポイントのいずれかの制御ポイントを表示させる表示制御部と、を備えたことを特徴とする。
In order to solve the above-described problem, an image editing apparatus according to the present invention includes a display unit including a display area for displaying an image, and the image displayed in the display area of the display unit. A setting unit for setting a control point when operating the image, and a partial region of the image displayed in the display region when the size of the image displayed on the display unit is larger than the size of the display region A resetting unit for resetting the control point, and displaying the image in the display area, and the control point set by the setting unit according to a display state of the image, or the resetting A display control unit for displaying any one of the control points reset by the unit.
また、前記制御ポイントは、前記画像を拡縮させる制御ポイント、又は前記画像を回転させる制御ポイントからなるものである。この場合、前記再設定部は、前記表示部に表示される画像の大きさが前記表示領域の大きさよりも大きいときに、前記表示領域に表示される前記画像の一部領域に対して前記制御ポイントを再設定することが好ましい。
Further, the control point is composed of a control point for scaling the image or a control point for rotating the image. In this case, when the size of the image displayed on the display unit is larger than the size of the display region, the resetting unit controls the partial region of the image displayed on the display region. It is preferable to reset the points.
また、前記画像に対してトリミング処理を実行する画像処理部をさらに備え、前記画像処理部により前記トリミング処理が実行された画像が表示されたときに、前記再設定部は、前記トリミング処理を施す前の画像に対して設定された制御ポイントを、前記トリミング処理が実行された画像に対して設定された制御ポイントに設定し直すものである。
In addition, the image processing unit further includes an image processing unit that performs a trimming process on the image. When the image on which the trimming process has been performed by the image processing unit is displayed, the resetting unit performs the trimming process. The control point set for the previous image is reset to the control point set for the image on which the trimming process has been executed.
この場合、前記表示制御部は、前記画像処理部による前記トリミング処理を再度実行する場合に、前記トリミング処理を実行する直前の画像及び前記トリミング処理の前に設定された制御ポイントを表示することが好ましい。
In this case, when the trimming process by the image processing unit is performed again, the display control unit may display an image immediately before the trimming process and a control point set before the trimming process. preferable.
また、前記表示制御部は、前記トリミング処理により切り出される第1の領域と、該第1の領域を除いた第2の領域との表示態様を異なる表示態様にて表示するものである。
Further, the display control unit displays the display mode of the first area cut out by the trimming process and the second area excluding the first area in different display modes.
また、本発明の画像編集装置は、複数の画像を重ね合わせて表示する表示部と、前記複数の画像のいずれか1つの画像を移動させて、他の画像との重ね合わせを一旦解除した後、移動させた画像を前記他の画像に重ね合わせたときに、重ね合わされる画像の表示順位を変更する表示制御部と、を備えたことを特徴とする。
In addition, the image editing apparatus according to the present invention moves a display unit that displays a plurality of images in a superimposed manner and any one of the plurality of images, and once cancels the registration with the other images. A display control unit that changes a display order of the superimposed images when the moved image is superimposed on the other image.
なお、前記表示部は、前記複数の画像を表示する表示領域を備え、前記移動させた画像が前記表示領域の外周縁に到達したことを受けて、前記表示順位の変更を許可する許可部を備えるものである。
The display unit includes a display area for displaying the plurality of images, and a permission unit that allows the display order to be changed in response to the moved image reaching the outer periphery of the display area. It is to be prepared.
また、前記表示順位は、前記移動させた画像に対する前記他の画像の位置関係によって変更されるものである。
Further, the display order is changed depending on the positional relationship of the other image with respect to the moved image.
この場合、前記表示制御部は、前記移動させた画像を前記他の画像に近づけるように移動させたときに、前記移動させた画像に対して1つの画像が所定範囲内に位置する場合に、前記移動させた画像の表示順位と前記1つの画像の表示順位とを入れ替えることが好ましい。
In this case, when the display control unit moves the moved image so as to approach the other image, when one image is located within a predetermined range with respect to the moved image, It is preferable that the display order of the moved image and the display order of the one image are switched.
また、この他に、前記表示制御部は、前記移動させた画像を前記他の画像に近づけるように移動させたときに、前記移動させた画像に対して2つの画像が所定範囲内に位置する場合に、前記移動させた画像の表示順位が前記2つの画像の表示順位の間となるように、重ね合わされる画像の表示順位を変更することが好ましい。
In addition, when the display control unit moves the moved image so as to approach the other image, two images are located within a predetermined range with respect to the moved image. In this case, it is preferable to change the display order of the superimposed images so that the display order of the moved image is between the display orders of the two images.
また、前記複数の画像のいずれかを移動させる際に操作される操作部材をさらに備えるものである。この場合、前記操作部材は、タッチパネルからなることが好ましい。
Further, an operation member that is operated when moving any of the plurality of images is further provided. In this case, the operation member is preferably a touch panel.
また、本発明の画像編集プログラムは、表示領域内に表示される画像に対して、前記画像を操作する際の制御ポイントを設定する設定工程と、表示される前記画像の大きさが前記表示領域の大きさよりも大きいときに、前記表示領域に表示される前記画像の一部領域に対して前記制御ポイントを再設定する再設定工程と、前記表示領域に前記画像を表示するとともに、前記画像の表示状態に応じて、前記設定工程により設定される前記制御ポイント、又は前記再設定工程により再設定される前記制御ポイントのいずれかの制御ポイントを表示させる表示工程と、をコンピュータにて実行させることが可能な、コンピュータ読み取り可能なものである。
Further, the image editing program of the present invention includes a setting step for setting a control point when operating the image with respect to the image displayed in the display area, and the size of the displayed image is the display area. A resetting step of resetting the control point for a partial area of the image displayed in the display area when the image is larger than the size of the image, displaying the image in the display area, According to a display state, causing the computer to execute a display step of displaying either the control point set by the setting step or the control point reset by the resetting step. Can be read by a computer.
また、本発明の画像編集プログラムは、複数の画像を重ね合わせて表示する表示工程と、前記複数の画像のいずれか1つの画像を移動させて、他の画像との重ね合わせを一旦解除した後、移動させた画像を前記他の画像に重ね合わせたときに、重ね合わされる画像の表示順位を変更する表示制御工程と、をコンピュータにて実行させることが可能な、コンピュータ読み取り可能なものである。
The image editing program according to the present invention includes a display step of displaying a plurality of images in a superimposed manner, and moving any one of the plurality of images to temporarily cancel the registration with the other images. The computer can execute a display control process for changing the display order of the superimposed images when the moved image is superimposed on the other image. .
また、本発明の電子情報端末機は、複数のページをページ単位で表示する表示装置と、前記表示装置に表示されたページに対して入力操作を受け付けるタッチパネルと、前記タッチパネルにて受け付けた入力操作及び該入力操作時の操作方向に基づいて、前記表示装置に表示された前記ページの少なくとも一部を切り離す入力操作が行われたか否かを判定する第1の判定手段と、前記第1の判定手段により前記ページの少なくとも一部を切り離す入力操作が行われたと判定されたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部を切り離して前記表示装置に表示させる表示制御手段と、を備えたことを特徴とする。
The electronic information terminal of the present invention includes a display device that displays a plurality of pages in units of pages, a touch panel that receives an input operation on the page displayed on the display device, and an input operation that is received by the touch panel. And first determination means for determining whether or not an input operation for separating at least a part of the page displayed on the display device has been performed based on an operation direction at the time of the input operation, and the first determination Display control means for separating and displaying at least a part of the page on the display device when it is determined that an input operation for separating at least a part of the page is performed by the means. .
また、前記表示制御手段は、前記ページの少なくとも一部が前記表示装置に表示されたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を他の電子情報端末機に送信するための送信先一覧を表示し、前記送信先一覧から目的の送信先を選択する入力操作を前記タッチパネルが受け付けたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信する送信手段を備えるものである。
Further, the display control means is a transmission destination for transmitting the content input to at least a part of the page to another electronic information terminal when at least a part of the page is displayed on the display device. When the touch panel accepts an input operation for displaying a list and selecting a destination from the destination list, an electronic information terminal serving as the destination for the content input to at least a part of the page A transmission means for transmitting to the machine is provided.
この場合、前記送信先一覧から目的の送信先を選択する入力操作を前記タッチパネルが受け付けた後、前記タッチパネルにて受け付けた入力操作及び該入力操作時の操作方向に基づいて、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信する入力操作が行われたか否かを判定する第2の判定手段を備え、前記送信手段は、前記第2の判定手段により前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信する入力操作が行われたと判定されたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信することが好ましい。
In this case, after the touch panel receives an input operation for selecting a target transmission destination from the transmission destination list, at least one of the pages based on the input operation received on the touch panel and the operation direction at the time of the input operation. Second determination means for determining whether or not an input operation for transmitting the content input to the electronic information terminal as the target transmission destination has been performed, wherein the transmission means includes the second When it is determined that an input operation for transmitting the content input to at least a part of the page by the determination unit to the electronic information terminal serving as the target transmission destination is performed, at least a part of the page It is preferable to transmit the content input to the electronic information terminal as the target transmission destination.
また、前記切り離された前記ページの少なくとも一部が前記表示装置に表示されたときに、前記タッチパネルにて受け付けた入力操作が前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を削除する入力操作が行われたか否かを判定する第3の判定手段と、前記第3の判定手段により前記ページの少なくとも一部を削除する入力操作が行われたと判定されたときに、前記前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を削除する内容削除手段とを、備えるものである。
In addition, when at least a part of the separated page is displayed on the display device, an input operation accepted by the touch panel performs an input operation to delete the content input to at least a part of the page. A third determination unit that determines whether or not the page has been received, and at least a part of the page when the third determination unit determines that an input operation for deleting at least a part of the page has been performed. Content deletion means for deleting the input content is provided.
また、本発明のポインティングデバイスは、入力操作を受け付ける電子情報端末機の表示画面に当接又は近接される入力部と、前記入力部が前記表示画面に当接又は近接されたときに操作される第1操作部と、前記第1操作部の操作時に、前記入力部が当接又は近接した位置における前記表示画面上の色情報を前記電子情報端末機から受信するデバイス側受信部と、前記デバイス側受信部により受信された色情報に基づいた色を表示する色表示部と、を備えたことを特徴とする。
In addition, the pointing device of the present invention is operated when the input unit is in contact with or close to the display screen of the electronic information terminal that accepts the input operation, and the input unit is in contact with or close to the display screen. A first operation unit; a device-side reception unit that receives color information on the display screen from the electronic information terminal at a position where the input unit is in contact with or close to the first operation unit; and the device And a color display unit for displaying a color based on the color information received by the side receiving unit.
また、前記第1操作部の操作時間、前記第1操作部の操作回数、或いは前記第1操作部の操作時に加わる圧力に基づいて、前記デバイス側受信部にて受信された前記色情報に基づく色を前記色表示部にレベル表示するデバイス側制御部を備えるものである。
Further, based on the color information received by the device-side receiving unit, based on the operation time of the first operation unit, the number of operations of the first operation unit, or the pressure applied when operating the first operation unit. A device-side control unit that displays the level of the color on the color display unit is provided.
また、時間的に前後して複数の色情報を受信した場合に、前記色表示部における色の表示を、時間的に先に受信した色情報に基づく色の表示から、時間的に後に受信した色情報に基づく色の表示に更新する単色モードを有するものである。
In addition, when a plurality of color information is received before and after the time, the color display in the color display unit is received later in time than the color display based on the color information received earlier in time. It has a single color mode for updating to a color display based on color information.
また、時間的に前後して複数の色情報を受信した場合に、前記色表示部における色の表示を、時間的に先に受信した色情報に基づく色の表示から、前記複数の色情報のそれぞれに基づく色を混ぜ合わせることで得られる色の表示に更新する混色モードを有するものである。
Further, when a plurality of color information is received before and after the time, the display of the color in the color display unit is changed from the display of the color based on the color information received earlier in time. It has a color mixing mode for updating to a color display obtained by mixing colors based on each.
この場合、前記混色モードにおいて、時間的に前後して得られる複数の色情報をそれぞれ受信したときの前記第1操作部の操作時間、前記第1操作部の操作回数、或いは前記第1操作部の操作時に加わる圧力に基づいて、前記複数の色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせる際の比率を設定する比率設定部と、前記比率設定部により設定される比率を用いて、前記時間的に前後して受信される複数の色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせることで得られる色の色情報を生成する生成部と、を備えていることが好ましい。
In this case, in the color mixture mode, the operation time of the first operation unit, the number of operations of the first operation unit, or the first operation unit when receiving a plurality of pieces of color information obtained before and after time. Based on the pressure applied during the operation, a ratio setting unit that sets a ratio when colors based on the plurality of color information are mixed, and a ratio set by the ratio setting unit is used to change the time. And a generation unit that generates color information of a color obtained by mixing colors based on a plurality of color information received.
また、前記色表示部は、前記時間的に前後して受信した複数の色情報に基づく色が混ぜ合わされる様子を示す動画表示を行うものである。
Further, the color display unit displays a moving image showing a state in which colors based on a plurality of color information received before and after the time are mixed.
また、前記デバイス側受信部にて受信した色情報、又は前記生成部により生成された色情報を少なくとも1以上記憶する記憶部と、前記少なくとも1以上の色情報を用いて前記入力操作を行う際に操作される第2操作部と、をさらに備えているものである。
Further, when performing the input operation using the storage unit that stores at least one or more color information received by the device-side receiving unit or the color information generated by the generation unit, and the at least one or more color information And a second operation unit operated by
また、本発明の入力システムは、上述したポインティングデバイスと、前記表示画面にタッチパネルを備えた電子情報端末機と、から構成され、前記ポインティングデバイスは、前記入力操作を行う際に使用する色情報を前記電子情報端末機に向けて送信するデバイス側送信部を備え、前記電子情報端末機は、前記ポインティングデバイスの前記第1操作部の操作を受けて、前記ポインティングデバイスの入力部が当接又は近接する位置における色情報を前記デバイス側受信部に向けて送信する端末機側送信部と、前記ポインティングデバイスを用いた入力操作時に前記デバイス側送信部から送信された色情報を受信する端末機側受信部と、前記端末機側受信部により受信した色情報を用いて、前記ポインティングデバイスを用いた入力操作に基づいた描画を前記表示画面に表示する端末機側制御部と、を備えることを特徴とする。
The input system of the present invention includes the above-described pointing device and an electronic information terminal having a touch panel on the display screen, and the pointing device displays color information used when performing the input operation. A device-side transmission unit configured to transmit to the electronic information terminal, wherein the electronic information terminal receives an operation of the first operation unit of the pointing device, and an input unit of the pointing device comes into contact or proximity A terminal-side transmission unit that transmits color information at a position to be transmitted toward the device-side reception unit, and a terminal-side reception that receives color information transmitted from the device-side transmission unit during an input operation using the pointing device And the color information received by the terminal-side receiving unit using the pointing device. Characterized in that it and a terminal-side controller to be displayed on the display screen drawing based on.
以下、本発明の携帯型電子情報端末機について説明する。
Hereinafter, the portable electronic information terminal of the present invention will be described.
図1~図3に示すように、本発明の携帯型電子情報端末機10は、ベルト付きのシステム手帳を模した外観からなる。この携帯型電子情報端末機10は、装置本体15、ベルト16及びペンホルダ17から構成される。
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the portable electronic information terminal 10 of the present invention has an appearance simulating a system notebook with a belt. The portable electronic information terminal 10 includes an apparatus main body 15, a belt 16 and a pen holder 17.
装置本体15は、第1筐体20、第2筐体21及びヒンジ部22とから構成される。装置本体15は、2つに折りたたまれた状態で保持することができる。また、装置本体15は、折りたたまれた装置本体15の第1筐体20、又は第2筐体21の少なくともいずれか一方を他方の筐体に対して相対的に回転させることで、装置本体15を広げた状態にすることができる。
The apparatus body 15 includes a first housing 20, a second housing 21, and a hinge part 22. The apparatus main body 15 can be held in a folded state. In addition, the apparatus main body 15 rotates at least one of the first casing 20 and the second casing 21 of the folded apparatus main body 15 relative to the other casing, thereby causing the apparatus main body 15 to rotate. Can be expanded.
ここで、2つ折りの折りたたみ構造からなる携帯型電子情報端末機10を例示しているが、これに限定される必要はなく、3つ折り以上の折りたたみ構造からなる携帯型電子情報端末機であってもよい。また、折りたたみ構造からなる携帯型電子情報端末機の他に、複数の筐体から構成され、複数の筐体のそれぞれを相対的にスライドさせることが可能なスライド構造からなる携帯型電子情報端末機であっても本発明を達成することができる。
Here, the portable electronic information terminal 10 having a folded structure of two folds is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a portable electronic information terminal having a folded structure of three or more folds. Also good. Further, in addition to the portable electronic information terminal having a folding structure, the portable electronic information terminal having a slide structure that is configured by a plurality of casings and that can slide each of the plurality of casings relatively. Even so, the present invention can be achieved.
以下、装置本体15が2つに折りたたまれた状態を第2状態とし、筐体本体15が広げられた状態を第1状態と称して説明する。ここで、携帯型電子情報端末機10が第2状態となる場合、後述する第1表示部25及び第2表示部28は、それぞれ対面された状態で収納される。
Hereinafter, a state in which the apparatus main body 15 is folded in two will be referred to as a second state, and a state in which the housing main body 15 is expanded will be referred to as a first state. Here, when the portable electronic information terminal 10 is in the second state, a first display unit 25 and a second display unit 28, which will be described later, are stored in a state of facing each other.
第1筐体20は、面20aに第1表示部25を備えている。この第1筐体20は、面20aとは反対側の面20bに、後述する撮像ユニット51のレンズ面26及び閃光装置57の発光面27を備えている。これらレンズ面26及び発光面27は、図2中x方向においてヒンジ部22が設けられる一端とは反対側の端部で、且つ図2中y方向において第1筐体20の略中央に配置される。このレンズ面26の外周縁部には、面20bから突出した留め具30の雌部材31が設けられる。
The first housing 20 includes a first display unit 25 on the surface 20a. The first housing 20 includes a lens surface 26 of an imaging unit 51 and a light emitting surface 27 of a flash device 57, which will be described later, on a surface 20b opposite to the surface 20a. The lens surface 26 and the light emitting surface 27 are disposed at the end opposite to the end where the hinge portion 22 is provided in the x direction in FIG. 2 and at the approximate center of the first housing 20 in the y direction in FIG. The A female member 31 of a fastener 30 protruding from the surface 20b is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the lens surface 26.
第2筐体21は、面21aに第2表示部28を備えている。また、この第2筐体21は、側面21bに、ベルト16を備えている。このベルト16は、図3中x方向において、ヒンジ部22によって第1筐体20と連結される一端部とは反対側の端部で、図3中y方向において略中央に設けられる。つまり、ベルト16は、一端が第2筐体21に取り付けられる固定端となり、他端が自由端となる。このベルト16の長さは、例えばペンホルダ17に電子ペン40が装着された状態で、装置本体15に対して第1筐体20側に巻き掛けたときに、ベルト16の自由端の位置が、留め具30の雌部材31の位置よりもヒンジ部22側となる長さに設定される。
The second housing 21 includes a second display unit 28 on the surface 21a. Further, the second casing 21 includes a belt 16 on the side surface 21b. The belt 16 is provided at the substantially center in the y direction in FIG. 3 at the end opposite to the one end connected to the first housing 20 by the hinge 22 in the x direction in FIG. That is, one end of the belt 16 is a fixed end attached to the second housing 21, and the other end is a free end. The length of the belt 16 is such that, for example, when the electronic pen 40 is attached to the pen holder 17 and the belt 16 is wound around the apparatus body 15 on the first housing 20 side, the position of the free end of the belt 16 is The length is set to be closer to the hinge portion 22 than the position of the female member 31 of the fastener 30.
ベルト16の固定端側にはペンホルダ17が設けられる。このペンホルダ17には、スタイラスペンと呼ばれる電子ペン40が装着される。なお、ペンホルダ17に電子ペン40が装着されるとしているが、これに限定される必要はなく、電子ペン40の他に、万年筆やボールペンシルなどを装着してもよい。なお、この電子ペン40は、第1表示部25及び第2表示部28への入力時に用いられる。
A pen holder 17 is provided on the fixed end side of the belt 16. An electronic pen 40 called a stylus pen is attached to the pen holder 17. Although the electronic pen 40 is attached to the pen holder 17, the present invention is not limited to this, and a fountain pen or a ball pencil may be attached in addition to the electronic pen 40. The electronic pen 40 is used when inputting to the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28.
上述したベルト16の自由端側には、留め具30の雄部材32が設けられる。ベルト16に設けられる留め具30の雄部材32が設けられる位置は、ベルト16を装置本体15の外周に沿って巻き掛けたときに、第1筐体20に設けられた留め具30の雌部材31と嵌合できる位置である。
The male member 32 of the fastener 30 is provided on the free end side of the belt 16 described above. The position at which the male member 32 of the fastener 30 provided on the belt 16 is provided is the female member of the fastener 30 provided on the first housing 20 when the belt 16 is wound around the outer periphery of the apparatus main body 15. 31 is a position where it can be fitted.
上述したように、留め具30は、第1筐体20に設けられる雌部材31と、ベルト16の自由端側に設けられる雄部材32とからなる、例えばスナップボタン方式の留め具から構成される。この留め具30は、携帯型電子情報端末機10を不使用状態とするときにベルト16に設けられた雄部材32を、第1筐体20に設けられる雌部材31に嵌合させることで、第1筐体20又は第2筐体21のいずれか一方が他方に対して回動することを防止する。また、留め具30の雌部材31と雄部材32とを嵌合させることで、撮像ユニット51のレンズ面26が被覆される。よって、留め具30は、レンズキャップ(レンズカバー)としても機能する。また、留め具30の雌部材31と雄部材32とを嵌合させると、後述する電源スイッチ63がオフとなり、雌部材31と雄部材32との嵌合を解除すると、電源スイッチ63がオンとなる。
As described above, the fastener 30 is composed of, for example, a snap button type fastener including the female member 31 provided in the first housing 20 and the male member 32 provided on the free end side of the belt 16. . The fastener 30 is formed by fitting a male member 32 provided on the belt 16 to a female member 31 provided on the first housing 20 when the portable electronic information terminal 10 is not used. Any one of the first housing 20 and the second housing 21 is prevented from rotating with respect to the other. Further, the lens surface 26 of the imaging unit 51 is covered by fitting the female member 31 and the male member 32 of the fastener 30 together. Therefore, the fastener 30 also functions as a lens cap (lens cover). Further, when the female member 31 and the male member 32 of the fastener 30 are fitted together, a power switch 63 described later is turned off, and when the fitting between the female member 31 and the male member 32 is released, the power switch 63 is turned on. Become.
図4は、携帯型電子情報端末機10の電気的構成を示す機能ブロック図である。携帯型電子情報端末機10は、撮像ユニット51、A/D変換器52、バッファメモリ53、画像処理回路54、第1表示部25、第2表示部28、表示制御回路55、コントローラ56、閃光装置57、傾斜センサ58、CPU59、内蔵メモリ60、データメモリ61、通信部62、電源スイッチ63、電源回路64及び電源装置65を備えている。なお、A/D変換器52、バッファメモリ53、画像処理回路54、表示制御回路55、コントローラ56、閃光装置57、傾斜センサ58、CPU59、内蔵メモリ60、データメモリ61及び通信部62は、それぞれバス66を介して接続される。
FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the portable electronic information terminal 10. The portable electronic information terminal 10 includes an imaging unit 51, an A / D converter 52, a buffer memory 53, an image processing circuit 54, a first display unit 25, a second display unit 28, a display control circuit 55, a controller 56, a flash. A device 57, a tilt sensor 58, a CPU 59, a built-in memory 60, a data memory 61, a communication unit 62, a power switch 63, a power circuit 64, and a power device 65 are provided. The A / D converter 52, the buffer memory 53, the image processing circuit 54, the display control circuit 55, the controller 56, the flash device 57, the tilt sensor 58, the CPU 59, the built-in memory 60, the data memory 61, and the communication unit 62 are respectively Connection is made via a bus 66.
撮像ユニット51は、撮像光学系68及び撮像素子69を備え、これらが図示を省略したホルダによって保持されたユニット部品からなる。なお、撮像光学系68は、単数のレンズから構成されてもよいし、複数のレンズから構成されてもよい。撮像素子69としては、例えばCCDイメージセンサや、CMOSイメージセンサなどが用いられる。なお、この撮像光学系68および撮像素子69は、CPU59によって駆動制御される。A/D変換器52は、撮像素子69から出力される画像信号をアナログの画像信号からデジタルの画像信号に変換する。A/D変換器52によって変換されたデジタルの画像信号はバッファメモリ53に書き込まれる。
The image pickup unit 51 includes an image pickup optical system 68 and an image pickup element 69, which are composed of unit parts held by a holder (not shown). The imaging optical system 68 may be composed of a single lens or a plurality of lenses. For example, a CCD image sensor or a CMOS image sensor is used as the imaging element 69. The image pickup optical system 68 and the image pickup element 69 are driven and controlled by the CPU 59. The A / D converter 52 converts the image signal output from the image sensor 69 from an analog image signal to a digital image signal. The digital image signal converted by the A / D converter 52 is written in the buffer memory 53.
画像処理回路54は、バッファメモリ53に書き込まれる画像信号に対して、ホワイトバランス処理、階調変換処理などの周知の画像処理を実行する。また、この他に、画像処理回路54は、画像のトリミング処理、画像に対する描画処理、画像の合成処理など、画像編集に基づく処理も実行する。
The image processing circuit 54 performs well-known image processing such as white balance processing and gradation conversion processing on the image signal written in the buffer memory 53. In addition to this, the image processing circuit 54 also executes processing based on image editing, such as image trimming processing, image rendering processing, and image composition processing.
第1表示部25は、表示装置70及びタッチパネル71を備えている。表示装置70としては、例えばLCDや有機ELディスプレイなどが用いられる。タッチパネル71は、例えば電磁誘導方式のタッチパネルである。このタッチパネル71は、表示装置70の裏面側に配置される。タッチパネル71として電磁誘導方式のタッチパネルを用いることで、電子ペン40が第1表示部25に当接又は近接したときに、電子ペン40により発生する電磁波を検知する。これにより、第1表示部25に当接又は近接される電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41又は入力スイッチ42の位置や、電子ペン40の傾きを検知する。また、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41又は入力スイッチ42が第1表示部25に当接される場合、当接される入力スイッチ41又は入力スイッチ42に加わる圧力によって変化する電磁波の強さから、筆圧を検知する。
The first display unit 25 includes a display device 70 and a touch panel 71. As the display device 70, for example, an LCD or an organic EL display is used. The touch panel 71 is, for example, an electromagnetic induction type touch panel. The touch panel 71 is disposed on the back side of the display device 70. By using an electromagnetic induction type touch panel as the touch panel 71, an electromagnetic wave generated by the electronic pen 40 is detected when the electronic pen 40 contacts or approaches the first display unit 25. Accordingly, the position of the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 that is in contact with or close to the first display unit 25 and the inclination of the electronic pen 40 are detected. In addition, when the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 is brought into contact with the first display unit 25, the writing force is determined based on the strength of the electromagnetic wave that changes depending on the pressure applied to the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 that is in contact. Detect pressure.
なお、第1表示部25に設けられるタッチパネル71として電磁誘導方式のタッチパネルを挙げているが、これに限定される必要はない。例えば電子ペン40として、電磁誘導方式以外の方式となるスタイラスペンを用いない場合には、電子ペンに用いられる方式に対応したタッチパネルとすればよい。つまり、このタッチパネル71は、抵抗膜方式や静電容量方式のタッチパネルの他に、電磁誘導方式のタッチパネルと、抵抗膜方式や静電容量方式のタッチパネルのいずれかのタッチパネルとを併用したものであってもよい。このようなタッチパネルを用いることで、電子ペン40による入力操作の他に、ユーザの指による入力操作も可能となる。
In addition, although the electromagnetic induction type touch panel is mentioned as the touch panel 71 provided in the 1st display part 25, it is not necessary to be limited to this. For example, when a stylus pen that is a method other than the electromagnetic induction method is not used as the electronic pen 40, a touch panel corresponding to the method used for the electronic pen may be used. That is, this touch panel 71 is a combination of an electromagnetic induction type touch panel and any one of a resistive type and capacitive type touch panel in addition to a resistive type and capacitive type touch panel. May be. By using such a touch panel, an input operation with a user's finger can be performed in addition to an input operation with the electronic pen 40.
第2表示部28は、第1表示部25と同様に、表示装置72及びタッチパネル73を備えている。表示装置72は、表示装置70と同様に、例えばLCDや有機ELディスプレイなどが用いられる。タッチパネル73は、例えば抵抗膜方式のタッチパネルが用いられる。このタッチパネル73は、表示装置72の前面に配置される。タッチパネル73は、電子ペン40やユーザの指による入力操作が行われた位置、言い換えれば、電子ペン40やユーザの指が接触した位置を検知する。なお、第2表示部28に用いられるタッチパネル73として、抵抗膜方式のタッチパネルを例に挙げているが、これに限定される必要はなく、第1表示部25に設けられるタッチパネル71と同様に、電磁誘導方式のタッチパネルを用いてもよいし、抵抗膜方式のタッチパネルと電磁誘導方式のタッチパネルとの双方を併用することも可能である。
As with the first display unit 25, the second display unit 28 includes a display device 72 and a touch panel 73. As the display device 70, for example, an LCD or an organic EL display is used for the display device 72. As the touch panel 73, for example, a resistive film type touch panel is used. The touch panel 73 is disposed on the front surface of the display device 72. The touch panel 73 detects a position where an input operation is performed with the electronic pen 40 or the user's finger, in other words, a position where the electronic pen 40 or the user's finger contacts. In addition, as the touch panel 73 used for the 2nd display part 28, although the resistive film type touch panel is mentioned as an example, it is not necessary to be limited to this, As with the touch panel 71 provided in the 1st display part 25, An electromagnetic induction type touch panel may be used, or both a resistive film type touch panel and an electromagnetic induction type touch panel may be used in combination.
表示制御回路55は、表示装置70及び表示装置72のそれぞれに対する表示制御を実行する。コントローラ56は、タッチパネル71やタッチパネル73を駆動し、これらタッチパネル71やタッチパネル73からの検知信号に基づく座標信号をCPU59に出力する。
The display control circuit 55 executes display control for each of the display device 70 and the display device 72. The controller 56 drives the touch panel 71 and the touch panel 73 and outputs coordinate signals based on detection signals from the touch panel 71 and touch panel 73 to the CPU 59.
閃光装置57は、撮影時に被写体に向けて閃光を発光する装置である。傾斜センサ58は、例えばジャイロセンサや加速度センサが用いられる。この傾斜センサ58からの検出信号は、CPU59に入力される。CPU59は、この傾斜センサ58からの検出信号に基づいて、装置本体15の傾斜状態を判別する。
The flash device 57 is a device that emits a flash toward the subject during shooting. As the inclination sensor 58, for example, a gyro sensor or an acceleration sensor is used. A detection signal from the tilt sensor 58 is input to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 determines the tilt state of the apparatus main body 15 based on the detection signal from the tilt sensor 58.
CPU59は、内蔵メモリ60に記憶された制御プログラムを実行することで、携帯型電子情報端末機10の各部を制御する。例えば上述したコントローラ56からの検出信号を受けて、CPU59は、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41、又は入力スイッチ42の位置座標、筆圧、電子ペン40の傾きなどの情報を取得する。CPU59は、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41、又は入力スイッチ42の位置座標、筆圧の情報に基づいて、画像処理回路54や表示制御回路55に制御信号を出力する。これにより、電子ペン40による入力に基づいた処理が実行される。なお、電子ペン40による入力に基づいた処理としては、例えば画像のトリミング処理、画像に対する描画処理、画像の合成処理など、画像編集する処理や、描画、画面の表示切り替え、表示された画像の移動等の処理が挙げられる。
The CPU 59 controls each part of the portable electronic information terminal 10 by executing a control program stored in the built-in memory 60. For example, in response to the detection signal from the controller 56 described above, the CPU 59 acquires information such as the position coordinates of the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40, the writing pressure, and the tilt of the electronic pen 40. The CPU 59 outputs a control signal to the image processing circuit 54 and the display control circuit 55 based on the position coordinates and writing pressure information of the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40. Thereby, the process based on the input with the electronic pen 40 is performed. The processing based on the input by the electronic pen 40 includes, for example, image editing processing such as image trimming processing, image drawing processing, image composition processing, drawing, screen display switching, and movement of the displayed image. And the like.
また、CPU59は、電子ペン40の傾きの情報や、傾斜センサ58からの検出信号から、装置本体15の姿勢を判別する。そして、CPU59は、装置本体15の姿勢を判別した結果に基づいて、第1表示部25及び第2表示部28のそれぞれに表示させる画面の向きを変更するか否かを判定する。例えば第1表示部25及び第2表示部28のそれぞれに表示される画面の向きを変更すると判定されている場合には、CPU59は、画面の向きや位置を変更する旨の制御信号を表示制御回路55に出力する。これにより、第1表示部25及び第2表示部28のそれぞれに表示される画面の向きが、装置本体15の傾きや電子ペン40の傾きに基づいて変更される。
Further, the CPU 59 determines the posture of the apparatus main body 15 from the information on the tilt of the electronic pen 40 and the detection signal from the tilt sensor 58. Then, the CPU 59 determines whether or not to change the orientation of the screen displayed on each of the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 based on the result of determining the posture of the apparatus main body 15. For example, when it is determined that the orientation of the screen displayed on each of the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 is to be changed, the CPU 59 controls the display of a control signal for changing the orientation and position of the screen. Output to the circuit 55. Thereby, the orientation of the screen displayed on each of the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 is changed based on the tilt of the apparatus main body 15 or the tilt of the electronic pen 40.
内蔵メモリ60は、CPU59によって実行される制御プログラムや各種データを記憶する。また、データメモリ61は、後述する画像データ、イラスト画像データ、シール画像データ、WEBデータなどを、データの種類毎に分類して記憶する。
The built-in memory 60 stores a control program executed by the CPU 59 and various data. The data memory 61 stores image data, illustration image data, sticker image data, WEB data, etc., which will be described later, classified according to the type of data.
通信部62は、有線通信や無線通信のいずれかの通信方法を用いて、外部機器74との間でデータや信号の送受信などを行う。なお、符号74aは、外部機器に設けられた通信部である。ここで、外部機器74としては、デジタルカメラに代表される撮像装置の他、携帯型電子情報端末機やコンピュータなどが挙げられる。
The communication unit 62 transmits / receives data and signals to / from the external device 74 using any one of wired communication and wireless communication methods. Reference numeral 74a denotes a communication unit provided in an external device. Here, examples of the external device 74 include an image pickup apparatus represented by a digital camera, a portable electronic information terminal, a computer, and the like.
電源スイッチ63は、携帯型電子情報端末機10の主電源をオン/オフするために設けられる。この電源スイッチ63は、留め具30の雌部材31を雄部材32に嵌合されたときにオフとなり、留め具30の雌部材31と雄部材32との嵌合が解除されたときにオンとなる。この電源スイッチ63は、機械式スイッチ、或いは電子式スイッチのいずれかが用いられる。留め具30による電源スイッチ床となる電源スイッチ63を別途設けるようにしてもよい。
The power switch 63 is provided to turn on / off the main power of the portable electronic information terminal 10. The power switch 63 is turned off when the female member 31 of the fastener 30 is fitted to the male member 32, and is turned on when the fitting between the female member 31 and the male member 32 of the fastener 30 is released. Become. As the power switch 63, either a mechanical switch or an electronic switch is used. You may make it provide the power switch 63 used as the power switch floor by the fastener 30 separately.
電源回路64は、電源スイッチ63がオフとなる場合に、CPU59に対してのみ給電を行う制御を実行する。また、電源回路64は、電源スイッチ63がオンとなる場合に、電源装置65から携帯型電子情報端末機10の各部に対して給電を行う。なお、この電源回路64における電源装置65の制御は、CPU59からの駆動信号を受けて実行される。
The power supply circuit 64 executes control for supplying power only to the CPU 59 when the power switch 63 is turned off. The power supply circuit 64 supplies power from the power supply device 65 to each part of the portable electronic information terminal 10 when the power switch 63 is turned on. The control of the power supply device 65 in the power supply circuit 64 is executed in response to a drive signal from the CPU 59.
図5は、携帯型電子情報端末機10の使用状態における表示画面を示す。携帯型電子情報端末機10は、上述した第1表示部25及び第2表示部28において、それぞれ異なる機能に対応した画面が表示される。これら第1表示部25及び第2表示部28に表示される画面は、それぞれ連携している。
FIG. 5 shows a display screen when the portable electronic information terminal 10 is in use. The portable electronic information terminal 10 displays screens corresponding to different functions on the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 described above. The screens displayed on the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28 are linked to each other.
第1表示部25は作業用画面を表示する。この作業用画面としては、編集画面、撮影用画面が挙げられる。編集画面は、例えば描画、文字の手書き入力、画像のトリミング、画像の合成などの編集作業を行う画面である。また、撮影用画面は、撮像ユニット51により取り込まれるスルー画像や、撮影により得られる画像を表示する画面である。なお、これら画面はタブ表示より表示される。つまり、上述した編集画面及び撮影用画面には、タブが付されている。図5においては、タブ名「edit」が編集画面、タブ名「camera」が撮影用画面を示すものである。なお、この図5では、編集画面を表示する場合について記載している。
The first display unit 25 displays a work screen. Examples of the work screen include an editing screen and a shooting screen. The editing screen is a screen for performing editing operations such as drawing, handwriting input of characters, image trimming, and image synthesis. The shooting screen is a screen that displays a through image captured by the imaging unit 51 and an image obtained by shooting. These screens are displayed from the tab display. That is, the above-described editing screen and shooting screen are provided with tabs. In FIG. 5, the tab name “edit” indicates the editing screen, and the tab name “camera” indicates the shooting screen. FIG. 5 shows a case where an edit screen is displayed.
編集画面及び撮影用画面間の切り替えは、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41又は入力スイッチ42のいずれかを使用するタブの位置に近接又は当接させる、又は、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41又は入力スイッチ42のいずれかを第1表示部25に近接、又は当接させた状態で電子ペン40を-x方向又はx方向に移動させることで実行される。以下、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41又は入力スイッチ42のいずれかを第1表示部25に近接、又は当接させた状態で電子ペン40を-x方向又はx方向に移動させる操作を、電子ペン40をはらう操作と称する。また、編集画面においては、1画面ではなく複数画面となる場合もあることから、編集画面間での切り替えも、電子ペン40をはらう操作を行うことで実行される。なお、画面間の切り替えに用いる表示としては、例えば手帳のページをめくる動作を模した動画表示が挙げられる。
Switching between the edit screen and the shooting screen is performed by bringing the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 close to or in contact with the position of the tab used, or the input switch 41 or the input switch of the electronic pen 40. This is executed by moving the electronic pen 40 in the −x direction or the x direction in a state where any one of 42 is close to or in contact with the first display unit 25. Hereinafter, an operation of moving the electronic pen 40 in the −x direction or the x direction in a state where either the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 is brought close to or in contact with the first display unit 25 will be described. 40 is referred to as an operation. In addition, since the editing screen may be a plurality of screens instead of a single screen, switching between the editing screens is also performed by performing an operation with the electronic pen 40. As a display used for switching between screens, for example, a moving image display imitating an operation of turning a page of a notebook is cited.
第1表示部25に表示される画面を編集画面から撮影用画面に切り替えると、上述した撮像ユニット51が起動する。この撮像ユニット51の起動により所定時間間隔でスルー画像が取得される。このスルー画像は第1表示部25に順次表示される。これにより、第1表示部25においてライブビュー表示が実行される。このライブビュー表示の際に、電子ペン40を用いた入力操作が実行されると撮像処理が実行される。なお、電子ペン40を用いた撮像処理については、後述する。撮像処理が実行されると、撮像処理により得られる画像が第1表示部25に表示される。そして、電子ペン40を用いた入力操作により、第1表示部25に表示される画面を撮影用画面から編集画面に切り替えると、撮像ユニット51の駆動が停止する。
When the screen displayed on the first display unit 25 is switched from the editing screen to the shooting screen, the above-described imaging unit 51 is activated. Through images are acquired at predetermined time intervals by the activation of the imaging unit 51. The through images are sequentially displayed on the first display unit 25. As a result, live view display is executed on the first display unit 25. When an input operation using the electronic pen 40 is executed during the live view display, an imaging process is executed. The imaging process using the electronic pen 40 will be described later. When the imaging process is executed, an image obtained by the imaging process is displayed on the first display unit 25. Then, when the screen displayed on the first display unit 25 is switched from the shooting screen to the editing screen by an input operation using the electronic pen 40, the driving of the imaging unit 51 is stopped.
第2表示部28はライブラリ画面を表示する。ライブラリ画面としては、画像一覧画面、イラスト画像一覧画面、シール画像一覧画面、WEB画面などが挙げられる。なお、画像一覧画面は携帯用電子情報端末機10に記憶される画像(静止画像、動画像含む)の一覧を表示する画面、イラスト画像一覧画面は描画を行うことで得られるイラスト画像の一覧を表示する画面である。また、シール画像一覧画面は画像の合成時に用いるデコレーション画像(以下、シール画像)の一覧を表示する画面、WEB画面はWEBデータ(例えばメールアドレスのデータなど)の一覧を表示する画面である。なお、図5においては、タブ名「photo」は画像一覧画面、タブ名「illustration」はイラスト画像一覧画面、タブ名「seal」はシール画像一覧画面、タブ名「WEB」は、WEB画面を示すものである。
The second display unit 28 displays the library screen. Examples of the library screen include an image list screen, an illustration image list screen, a seal image list screen, and a WEB screen. The image list screen displays a list of images (including still images and moving images) stored in the portable electronic information terminal 10, and the illustration image list screen displays a list of illustration images obtained by drawing. This is the screen to be displayed. Also, the sticker image list screen is a screen for displaying a list of decoration images (hereinafter referred to as sticker images) used at the time of image synthesis, and the WEB screen is a screen for displaying a list of WEB data (for example, mail address data). In FIG. 5, the tab name “photo” indicates the image list screen, the tab name “illustration” indicates the illustration image list screen, the tab name “seal” indicates the seal image list screen, and the tab name “WEB” indicates the WEB screen. Is.
ライブラリ画面内の画面の切り替えは、作業用画面における画面切り替えと同様に、電子ペン40を用いたタブの選択操作や、電子ペン40をはらう操作により実行される。この場合も、各タブ内の画面が複数ある場合には、電子ペン40をはらう操作により、画面の切り替え表示が実行される。なお、上述したライブラリ画面におけるタブの追加や削除は、電子ペン40を用いた入力操作により可能となる。
The switching of the screen in the library screen is executed by a tab selection operation using the electronic pen 40 or an operation using the electronic pen 40, similarly to the screen switching on the work screen. Also in this case, when there are a plurality of screens in each tab, the screen switching display is executed by an operation with the electronic pen 40. Note that the addition and deletion of tabs on the library screen described above can be performed by an input operation using the electronic pen 40.
図6は、電子ペン40の入力操作による編集動作の一例を示す。上述したように、第1表示部25に表示される画面が編集画面の場合には、描画、文字の手書き入力等の入力機能の他、画像のトリミング、画像の合成などの編集機能を実行することができる。例えば、描画、文字の手書き入力を行う場合には、電子ペン40を用いて、ユーザの意図する文字を入力する、或いは絵を描くことで実行される。なお、線種や線の色などは、例えば第1表示部25に表示される設定項目から、電子ペン40を用いて選択することで変更することができる。
FIG. 6 shows an example of an editing operation by an input operation of the electronic pen 40. As described above, when the screen displayed on the first display unit 25 is an editing screen, in addition to input functions such as drawing and handwriting input of characters, editing functions such as image trimming and image composition are executed. be able to. For example, when drawing or handwriting input of characters, the electronic pen 40 is used to input characters intended by the user or draw a picture. The line type, line color, and the like can be changed by selecting the setting items displayed on the first display unit 25 using the electronic pen 40, for example.
上述したように、第1表示部25に用いられるタッチパネル71として電磁誘導方式のタッチパネルを用いる場合、表示装置70の背面側にタッチパネルが配置される。このため、電子ペン40を用いた描画操作や文字入力操作、或いは選択操作を行うときには、表示装置70の厚みなどの影響を受けて、電子ペン40の先端の位置と、実際に入力操作が行われる位置がずれてしまうことがある。このため、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41又は入力スイッチ42が近接したときに、実際の電子ペン40における入力操作位置(ポインティング位置)を表示することが好ましい。
As described above, when an electromagnetic induction type touch panel is used as the touch panel 71 used for the first display unit 25, the touch panel is disposed on the back side of the display device 70. For this reason, when performing a drawing operation, a character input operation, or a selection operation using the electronic pen 40, the position of the tip of the electronic pen 40 and the actual input operation are performed under the influence of the thickness of the display device 70 and the like. The position that is displayed may shift. For this reason, it is preferable to display the actual input operation position (pointing position) in the electronic pen 40 when the input switch 41 or the input switch 42 of the electronic pen 40 approaches.
次に、第2表示部28に表示される画像一覧画面に表示される画像を編集する場合について説明する。例えば、図7(a)に示すように、第2表示部28に表示されたライブラリ画面に表示された画像のうち、画像75を編集対象とする場合、ユーザは、電子ペン40を用いて画像75を選択し、F方向に電子ペン40をはらう操作をする。電子ペン40をはらう操作をすることで、選択された画像75が、電子ペン40をはらう操作と同一方向(この場合、F方向)に移動し、第1表示部25の所定位置で停止される。つまり、上述した動作を行うことで、選択された画像が第2表示部28に表示されるライブラリ画面から第1表示部25に表示される編集画面に放り込まれる(図7(b)参照)。なお、移動する画像の移動方向や速度、停止させる位置は、電子ペン40の移動方向や、移動速度に準じて設定される。
Next, a case where an image displayed on the image list screen displayed on the second display unit 28 is edited will be described. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, when the image 75 is an editing target among the images displayed on the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28, the user uses the electronic pen 40 to display the image. 75 is selected, and the electronic pen 40 is operated in the F direction. By performing an operation with the electronic pen 40, the selected image 75 moves in the same direction as the operation with the electronic pen 40 (in this case, the F direction), and is stopped at a predetermined position on the first display unit 25. . That is, by performing the above-described operation, the selected image is thrown from the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28 to the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25 (see FIG. 7B). Note that the moving direction and speed of the moving image and the stop position are set according to the moving direction and moving speed of the electronic pen 40.
また、第2表示部28に表示されるライブラリ画面から第1表示部25に表示される編集画面に複数の画像を移動させる場合、編集画面上で画像が重なることが考えられるので、このような場合には、予め設定された距離分ずらすように、各画像の移動場所が調整される。
In addition, when a plurality of images are moved from the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28 to the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25, the images may overlap on the editing screen. In this case, the moving location of each image is adjusted so as to be shifted by a preset distance.
なお、第2表示部28に表示されるライブラリ画面から第1表示部25に表示される編集画面に移動した画像に対しては、例えば描画、文字の手書き入力、画像のトリミング、画像の合成などの編集操作を実行することができる。なお、第1表示部25に表示される編集画面から第2表示部28に表示されるライブラリ画面に画像を移動させる場合も、第2表示部28に表示されるライブラリ画面から第1表示部25に表示される編集画面に画像を移動させる場合と同様に、電子ペン40により画像を選択した状態で電子ペン40をはらう操作を行うことで実行される。
For an image moved from the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28 to the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25, for example, drawing, character handwriting input, image trimming, image synthesis, etc. The editing operation can be executed. In addition, when moving an image from the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25 to the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28, the first display unit 25 is switched from the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28. As in the case of moving the image to the editing screen displayed on the screen, the operation is performed by operating the electronic pen 40 while the image is selected with the electronic pen 40.
次に、画像の編集動作について説明する。図8は、第1表示部25の編集画面に画像が表示されたときの一例を示す。第1表示部25の編集画面に表示される画像80を選択すると、画像80の外周部には、選択された画像80の各辺に沿った拡大又は縮小用の操作バー(拡縮バー)81,82,83,84と、画像80の四隅に沿った回転用の操作バー(回転バー)85,86,87,88とが表示される。なお、これら拡縮バー81,82,83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88は、画像を操作する際に設定される制御ポイントの一例である。
Next, the image editing operation will be described. FIG. 8 shows an example when an image is displayed on the editing screen of the first display unit 25. When the image 80 displayed on the editing screen of the first display unit 25 is selected, an operation bar (enlargement / reduction bar) 81 for enlargement or reduction along each side of the selected image 80 is provided on the outer periphery of the image 80. 82, 83, 84 and operation bars (rotation bars) 85, 86, 87, 88 for rotation along the four corners of the image 80 are displayed. The enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are examples of control points set when an image is operated.
これら操作バーのうち、拡縮バー81,82,83,84は、画像80の拡大時又は縮小時に操作される。拡縮バー81,82,83,84のいずれかを画像80の中心Cから離れる方向、又は中心Cに近づく方向のいずれか一方に移動させると、例えば画像80の中心Cを基点として画像が拡大又は縮小される。
Of these operation bars, the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 are operated when the image 80 is enlarged or reduced. When any one of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 is moved in either the direction away from the center C of the image 80 or the direction approaching the center C, the image is enlarged or centered on the center C of the image 80, for example. Reduced.
図9(a)は、電子ペン40により例えば拡縮バー84を操作する場合を示す。電子ペン40により拡縮バー84を画像80の中心Cから離れる方向(x方向)に移動させると、編集画面に表示される画像80が、図中実線で示す大きさから二点鎖線で示す大きさに拡大される。一方、電子ペン40の操作により拡縮バー84を画像80の中心Cに近づく方向(-x方向)に移動させると、編集画面に表示される画像80が、図中実線で示す大きさから、点線で示す大きさに縮小される。なお、図9(a)においては、電子ペン40により拡縮バー84を操作する場合について説明しているが、他の拡縮バーを操作する場合についても同様である。ここで、画像の拡縮においては、その縦横比が固定である。
FIG. 9A shows a case where, for example, the enlargement / reduction bar 84 is operated by the electronic pen 40. When the enlargement / reduction bar 84 is moved away from the center C of the image 80 by the electronic pen 40 (x direction), the image 80 displayed on the editing screen has a size indicated by a two-dot chain line from a size indicated by a solid line in the drawing. Expanded to On the other hand, when the enlargement / reduction bar 84 is moved in the direction approaching the center C of the image 80 (−x direction) by the operation of the electronic pen 40, the image 80 displayed on the editing screen becomes a dotted line from the size indicated by the solid line in the figure. Reduced to the size indicated by. 9A illustrates the case where the enlargement / reduction bar 84 is operated with the electronic pen 40, the same applies to the case where other enlargement / reduction bars are operated. Here, in the scaling of the image, the aspect ratio is fixed.
ここで、縦横比を固定した画像の拡大又は縮小を行っているが、画像の拡大又は縮小時の縦横比を固定する必要はなく、移動させる拡縮バーの移動方向にのみ、画像の拡大又は縮小させることも可能である。具体的には、例えば拡縮バー84を画像80の中心Cから離れる方向(x方向)又は画像の中心Cに近づく方向(-x方向)に移動させたときには、画像80の横方向に対してのみ、画像80が拡大又は縮小される。
Here, the image having a fixed aspect ratio is enlarged or reduced. However, it is not necessary to fix the aspect ratio when the image is enlarged or reduced, and the image is enlarged or reduced only in the moving direction of the moving enlargement / reduction bar. It is also possible to make it. Specifically, for example, when the enlargement / reduction bar 84 is moved in the direction away from the center C of the image 80 (x direction) or in the direction approaching the center C of the image (−x direction), only in the lateral direction of the image 80 The image 80 is enlarged or reduced.
また、画像80の中心Cを基点として拡大又は縮小させているが、これに限定される必要はなく、画像80の四隅のうち、移動される拡縮バーと対向する2つの隅のいずれかを基点として拡大又は縮小させてもよい。
Further, the image C is enlarged or reduced with the center C of the image 80 as a base point, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the base point is one of the two corners of the image 80 opposite to the moved enlargement / reduction bar. Or may be enlarged or reduced.
回転バー85,86,87,88は、画像80の回転時に操作される。図9(b)に示すように、電子ペン40により回転バー85,86,87,88のいずれかを、R1方向又はR2方向に移動させると、例えば画像80の中心Cを基点として画像が回転される。ここで、図9(b)は、回転バー86をR1方向に回転させたときに、図中実線に表示される画像が画像80の中心Cを基点として二点鎖線で示す位置まで回転させる場合について図示している。なお、他の回転バーをR1方向又はR2方向に移動させた場合も同様である。ここで、回転バーのいずれかの操作が行われたときに、画像80は、画像80の中心Cを基点にして回転させているが、これに限定される必要はなく、例えば画像80の頂点80a,80b,80c,80d(図10(b)参照)のうち、回転バーに対向する位置にある頂点を基点として回転させることも可能である。
Rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are operated when the image 80 is rotated. As shown in FIG. 9B, when any of the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 is moved in the R1 direction or the R2 direction by the electronic pen 40, for example, the image is rotated around the center C of the image 80. Is done. Here, FIG. 9B shows a case where the image displayed on the solid line in the figure is rotated to the position indicated by the two-dot chain line with the center C of the image 80 as the base point when the rotation bar 86 is rotated in the R1 direction. Is illustrated. The same applies when other rotating bars are moved in the R1 direction or the R2 direction. Here, when any operation of the rotation bar is performed, the image 80 is rotated with the center C of the image 80 as a base point. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the vertex of the image 80 Of 80a, 80b, 80c, and 80d (see FIG. 10B), it is also possible to rotate with a vertex at a position facing the rotation bar as a base point.
ここで、電子ペン40による操作バーの操作において、操作される操作バーの表示態様については記載していないが、操作される操作バーの表示を他の操作バーの表示とは異なるように表示してよい。この場合、例えば操作される操作バーが認識しやすいように、操作される操作バーの色を、他の操作バーの色と異なる色にて表示する、又は、操作される操作バーのみを表示し、他の操作バーを非表示、或いは半透明にて表示することが挙げられる。また、操作される操作バーに対応するコメントを、該操作バーの近傍に表示することも可能である。
Here, in the operation of the operation bar with the electronic pen 40, the display mode of the operated operation bar is not described, but the display of the operated operation bar is displayed differently from the display of other operation bars. It's okay. In this case, for example, the color of the operated operation bar is displayed in a color different from the colors of other operation bars so that the operated operation bar can be easily recognized, or only the operated operation bar is displayed. Other operation bars may be hidden or displayed semi-transparently. In addition, a comment corresponding to the operation bar to be operated can be displayed in the vicinity of the operation bar.
上述した操作バーのいずれかの操作によって、編集する画像80の一部が第1表示部25の編集画面からはみ出してしまう場合がある。図10(a)に示すように、電子ペン40を用いて拡縮バー81をH方向に移動させると、この拡縮バー81の移動量に合わせて画像80が拡大していく。電子ペン40を用いて拡縮バー81をH方向に移動させ続けた場合には、拡縮バー81,82,83,84のいずれか、及び回転バー85,86,87,88のいずれかが編集画面からはみ出す場合がある。
Some operations on the operation bar described above may cause part of the image 80 to be edited to protrude from the editing screen of the first display unit 25. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the enlargement / reduction bar 81 is moved in the H direction using the electronic pen 40, the image 80 is enlarged according to the amount of movement of the enlargement / reduction bar 81. When the enlargement / reduction bar 81 is continuously moved in the H direction using the electronic pen 40, any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and any of the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are edited. It may stick out.
図10(b)は、画像80の長手方向の両端部が第1表示部25に表示される編集画面からはみ出した状態を示す。この状態では、拡縮バー83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88が編集画面からはみ出している。編集画面に表示される画像80に対して拡縮バー81,82が表示されている。このような場合、拡縮バー81,82のいずれかを用いて画像80を縮小する、或いは、編集画面に表示される画像80の位置をずらすことで、はみ出した拡縮バー83,84や、回転バー85,86,87,88のいずれかを表示させる必要がある。
FIG. 10B shows a state where both ends in the longitudinal direction of the image 80 protrude from the edit screen displayed on the first display unit 25. In this state, the expansion / contraction bars 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 protrude from the editing screen. Enlargement / reduction bars 81 and 82 are displayed for the image 80 displayed on the editing screen. In such a case, the enlargement / reduction bar 83, 84 or the rotation bar protruded by reducing the image 80 using any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, or by shifting the position of the image 80 displayed on the editing screen. One of 85, 86, 87, and 88 needs to be displayed.
このため、画像が編集画面上からはみ出した場合に、編集画面上に表示される画像の一部にあわせた拡縮バー及び回転バーを新たに設定し、該拡縮バー及び回転バーを表示する。図11に示すように、画像80の長手方向の両端部が編集画面からはみ出す場合には、編集画面に表示される画像80の上縁部と下縁部とのそれぞれに沿った拡縮バー81’,82’の他に、編集画面の縦方向(y方向)に沿った拡縮バー83’,84’が表示される。また、編集画面に表示される画像80の一部における四隅近傍に回転バー85’,86’,87’,88’が表示される。これら操作バーの表示により、編集画面に表示される画像の大きさを変えることなしに、画像80の拡大又は縮小、或いは画像80の回転などの編集操作を行うことができる。
For this reason, when the image protrudes from the editing screen, an enlargement / reduction bar and a rotation bar are newly set in accordance with a part of the image displayed on the editing screen, and the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar are displayed. As shown in FIG. 11, when both ends in the longitudinal direction of the image 80 protrude from the editing screen, the enlargement / reduction bar 81 ′ along each of the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion of the image 80 displayed on the editing screen is displayed. , 82 ′, enlargement / reduction bars 83 ′, 84 ′ along the vertical direction (y direction) of the editing screen are displayed. Also, rotation bars 85 ', 86', 87 ', 88' are displayed near the four corners of a part of the image 80 displayed on the editing screen. By displaying these operation bars, editing operations such as enlarging or reducing the image 80 or rotating the image 80 can be performed without changing the size of the image displayed on the editing screen.
なお、編集画面上で画像80を拡大する場合、編集画面に対する画像の位置によっては、画像80の頂点80a,80b,80c,80dのいずれかが表示される場合もある。図12は、画像の一部として頂点80aが表示される場合を示す。この状態では、画像80に対する操作バーとして、拡縮バー81,83の他に、回転バー85が表示される。つまり、画像80に対する編集操作としては、画像80の拡大又は縮小の他に、画像80の回転を行う操作を実行することが可能となる。
Note that when the image 80 is enlarged on the editing screen, one of the vertices 80a, 80b, 80c, and 80d of the image 80 may be displayed depending on the position of the image with respect to the editing screen. FIG. 12 shows a case where the vertex 80a is displayed as a part of the image. In this state, in addition to the enlargement / reduction bars 81 and 83, the rotation bar 85 is displayed as an operation bar for the image 80. That is, as an editing operation on the image 80, an operation for rotating the image 80 in addition to the enlargement or reduction of the image 80 can be executed.
このように、画像80が矩形などの多角形のときに画像80の頂点のいずれかかが編集画面に表示されていれば、画像を選択したときに設定される操作バーが表示されるので、編集画面に表示される画像の一部に基づいた操作バーを新たに設定する必要はない。もちろん、図13に示すように、矩形などの多角形からなる画像が編集画面からはみ出す場合には、編集画面に表示されている画像の一部に対して新たに操作バーを設定し、設定した操作バー(拡縮バー91,92,93,94,95及び回転バー96,97,98,99,100)を画像80とともに表示することは可能である。
Thus, if any of the vertices of the image 80 is displayed on the editing screen when the image 80 is a polygon such as a rectangle, the operation bar set when the image is selected is displayed. There is no need to newly set an operation bar based on a part of the image displayed on the editing screen. Of course, as shown in FIG. 13, when a polygonal image such as a rectangle protrudes from the editing screen, a new operation bar is set and set for a part of the image displayed on the editing screen. The operation bars (enlargement / reduction bars 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 and rotation bars 96, 97, 98, 99, 100) can be displayed together with the image 80.
以下、画像を拡大又は縮小させる、或いは画像を回転させる処理の流れを図14,図15のフローチャートに基づいて説明する。なお、図14,図15のフローチャートの処理の流れは、編集画面に画像が表示されたことを契機に実行される。
Hereinafter, the flow of processing for enlarging or reducing an image or rotating an image will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 and 15 is executed when an image is displayed on the editing screen.
ステップS101は、画像を選択する処理である。意図する画像を電子ペン40により選択すると、タッチパネル71により、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41が検知される。この検知信号を受けて、コントローラ56は、電子ペン40が検知される位置座標を特定する。CPU59は、表示装置70に表示される各画像の位置座標と、コントローラ56により特定された位置座標とから、電子ペン40により選択される画像80を特定する。
Step S101 is processing for selecting an image. When an intended image is selected with the electronic pen 40, the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71. In response to this detection signal, the controller 56 specifies the position coordinates at which the electronic pen 40 is detected. The CPU 59 specifies the image 80 selected by the electronic pen 40 from the position coordinates of each image displayed on the display device 70 and the position coordinates specified by the controller 56.
ステップS102は、拡縮バー及び回転バーを表示する処理である。CPU59は、ステップS101にて特定された画像の位置座標を参照し、拡縮バー81,82,83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88を設定する。そして、CPU59は、選択された画像の情報と、拡縮バー81,82,83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88の設定に関する情報とを表示制御回路55に出力する。これら情報を受けて、表示制御回路55は、表示装置70に表示された画像の外周部に拡縮バー81,82,83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88を表示する(図9(a)参照)。
Step S102 is a process for displaying an enlargement / reduction bar and a rotation bar. The CPU 59 sets the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 with reference to the position coordinates of the image specified in step S101. Then, the CPU 59 outputs information on the selected image and information on the settings of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 to the display control circuit 55. Receiving these pieces of information, the display control circuit 55 displays enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 on the outer periphery of the image displayed on the display device 70 (FIG. 9 ( a)).
ステップS103は、タッチパネルによる検知があるか否かを判定する処理である。電子ペン40による編集操作を行う場合には、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41を第1表示部25に近接、或いは当接させる。このとき、タッチパネル71により、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41が検知される。この検知により、コントローラ56は、入力スイッチ41が検知された位置座標を特定する。コントローラ56は、位置座標の情報をCPU59に出力する。CPU59は、位置座標の情報が入力されると、タッチパネル71による検知があると判定する。この場合、ステップS103の判定結果がYesとなり、ステップS104に進む。一方、コントローラ56から位置座標の情報が入力されない場合には、CPU59は、タッチパネル71による検知がないと判定する。この場合、ステップS103の判定結果がNoとなり、ステップS101に戻る。
Step S103 is a process for determining whether or not there is detection by the touch panel. When performing an editing operation using the electronic pen 40, the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 is brought close to or in contact with the first display unit 25. At this time, the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71. By this detection, the controller 56 specifies the position coordinates where the input switch 41 is detected. The controller 56 outputs position coordinate information to the CPU 59. When the position coordinates information is input, the CPU 59 determines that there is detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the determination result of step S103 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S104. On the other hand, when position coordinate information is not input from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines that there is no detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the determination result of step S103 is No, and the process returns to step S101.
ステップS104は、タッチパネルにおける検知位置が拡縮バーの領域内であるか否かを判定する処理である。ステップS103の判定結果により、コントローラ56からCPU59にタッチパネル71によって検知された位置座標の情報が入力されている。CPU59は、コントローラ56から入力された位置座標を用いて、拡縮バー81,82,83,84のいずれかの領域に含まれるか否かを判定する。例えば、コントローラ56から入力された位置座標が拡縮バー81,82,83,84のいずれかの領域に含まれる場合には、CPU59は、ステップS104の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS105に進む。一方、コントローラ56から入力された位置座標が拡縮バー81,82,83,84のいずれかの領域に含まれない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS104の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS115に進む。
Step S104 is a process of determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel is within the area of the enlargement / reduction bar. Based on the determination result in step S103, the position coordinate information detected by the touch panel 71 is input from the controller 56 to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 uses the position coordinates input from the controller 56 to determine whether it is included in any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84. For example, when the position coordinates input from the controller 56 are included in any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S104 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S105. On the other hand, when the position coordinates input from the controller 56 are not included in any of the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S104 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S115.
ステップS105は、タッチパネルにおける検知位置が画像の中心から離れる方向に移動しているか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、第1表示部25に近接又は当接される電子ペン40の入力スイッチは、タッチパネル71によって検知されている。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力される位置座標の情報からステップS105にて特定される拡縮バーの移動方向を特定する。この移動方向が画像の中心Cの位置座標から離れる方向であれば、CPU59は、ステップS105の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS106に進む。一方、移動方向が画像の中心の位置座標から離れる方向以外であれば、CPU59は、ステップS105の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS111に進む。
Step S105 is a process for determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel is moving away from the center of the image. As described above, the input switch of the electronic pen 40 that is in proximity to or in contact with the first display unit 25 is detected by the touch panel 71. The CPU 59 specifies the moving direction of the enlargement / reduction bar specified in step S <b> 105 from the position coordinate information output from the controller 56. If the moving direction is a direction away from the position coordinates of the center C of the image, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S105 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S106. On the other hand, if the moving direction is other than the direction away from the position coordinates of the center of the image, the CPU 59 determines No in step S105. In this case, the process proceeds to step S111.
ステップS106は、画像の拡大率を設定する処理である。CPU59は、入力される検出位置の位置座標を用いて、画像80の拡大率を設定する。画像処理回路54は、求めた拡大率の情報を用いて、表示している画像の元になる画像データに対して拡大処理を実行する。
Step S106 is a process for setting the enlargement ratio of the image. The CPU 59 sets the enlargement ratio of the image 80 using the position coordinates of the input detection position. The image processing circuit 54 executes enlargement processing on the image data that is the basis of the displayed image, using the obtained enlargement ratio information.
ステップS107は、拡縮バー及び回転バーの再設定を行う処理である。CPU59は、ステップS106にて設定された拡大率を用いて拡大される画像の大きさを推定する。CPU59は、拡大される画像の大きさと、編集画面の大きさとを比較する。この比較において、拡大される画像の大きさが、編集画面内に収まる大きさとなる場合には、CPU59は、拡大される画像の大きさに合わせて拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する。一方、拡大される画像の大きさが、編集画面からはみ出す大きさとなる場合には、CPU59は、以下の処理を実行する。
Step S107 is a process for resetting the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar. The CPU 59 estimates the size of the image to be enlarged using the enlargement rate set in step S106. The CPU 59 compares the size of the image to be enlarged with the size of the editing screen. In this comparison, when the size of the image to be enlarged is a size that fits within the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the size of the image to be enlarged. On the other hand, when the size of the image to be enlarged is a size that protrudes from the editing screen, the CPU 59 executes the following processing.
CPU59は、画像の頂点のいずれかが、編集画面内に含まれているか否かを判別する。画像の頂点のいずれかが編集画面内に含まれる場合には、CPU59は、拡大される画像のうち、編集画面に表示される辺及び頂点に合わせて拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する。一方、画像の頂点の全ての頂点が編集画面からはみ出している(外れている)場合には、CPU59は、拡大された画像のうち、編集画面に表示される領域に合わせて拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する。なお、再設定した拡縮バー及び回転バーの情報は、拡大処理が施された画像データとともに表示制御回路55によって読み出される。
The CPU 59 determines whether any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen. When any of the vertices of the image is included in the edit screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the sides and vertices displayed on the edit screen in the enlarged image. On the other hand, when all the vertices of the image are out of the editing screen (displaced), the CPU 59 enlarges / reduces the rotation bar and the rotation bar according to the area displayed on the editing screen in the enlarged image. To reset. Note that the information of the enlarged / reduced bar and rotation bar that have been reset is read by the display control circuit 55 together with the image data that has been subjected to the enlargement process.
ステップS108は、画像の拡大表示である。表示制御回路55は、入力される画像データに基づく画像を、先に表示されている画像と差し替えて表示する。この表示の際に、先に表示されている画像の中心Cと、拡大された画像の中心とが一致するように拡大された画像を表示する。また、表示制御回路55は、再設定した拡縮バー及び回転バーの情報に基づいて、画像の周縁部に操作バーのいずれかを表示する。図11に示すように、画像80の頂点全てが編集画面からはみ出している場合には、新たな拡縮バー81’,82’,83’,84’と、回転バー85’,86’,87’,88’とが表示される。また、図12に示すように、画像80の頂点のいずれか(図12においては、頂点80a)が表示されている場合には、拡縮バー81,83と、回転バー85とが表示される。
Step S108 is an enlarged display of the image. The display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the input image data by replacing the previously displayed image. At the time of this display, an enlarged image is displayed so that the center C of the previously displayed image matches the center of the enlarged image. Further, the display control circuit 55 displays one of the operation bars on the peripheral edge of the image based on the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar. As shown in FIG. 11, when all the vertices of the image 80 protrude from the editing screen, new enlargement / reduction bars 81 ′, 82 ′, 83 ′, 84 ′ and rotation bars 85 ′, 86 ′, 87 ′. , 88 'are displayed. As shown in FIG. 12, when any one of the vertices of the image 80 (vertex 80a in FIG. 12) is displayed, enlargement / reduction bars 81 and 83 and a rotation bar 85 are displayed.
ステップS109は、タッチパネルにおける検知位置が変化しているか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、タッチパネル71により電子ペン40が検知されると、コントローラ56により検知位置の位置座標が特定され、CPU59に検知位置の位置座標の情報が入力される。CPU59は、入力される検知位置の位置座標の情報を参照して、検知位置が変化しているか否かを判定する。タッチパネル71における検知位置が変化していない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS109の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS110に進む。
Step S109 is processing for determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel has changed. As described above, when the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71, the position coordinate of the detection position is specified by the controller 56, and the position coordinate information of the detection position is input to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 refers to the input position coordinate information of the detection position to determine whether or not the detection position has changed. When the detection position on the touch panel 71 has not changed, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S109. In this case, the process proceeds to step S110.
一方、タッチパネル71における検知位置が変化している場合には、CPU59は、ステップS109の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS105に戻る。
On the other hand, if the detection position on the touch panel 71 has changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S109 to No. In this case, the process returns to step S105.
ステップS110は、タッチパネルにおける検知がないかを判定する処理である。タッチパネル71において電子ペン40が検知されない場合には、タッチパネル71から検知信号が出力されず、また、コントローラ56からCPU59に対して検知位置の位置座標の情報が出力されない。CPU59は、検知位置の位置座標の情報が入力されるか否かによって、タッチパネル71における検知がないかを判定する。検知位置の位置座標の情報が入力されないときには、CPU59は、タッチパネル71の検知がないと判定する。つまり、CPU59は、ステップS110の判定結果をYesとし、ステップS101の処理に戻る。一方、検知位置の位置座標の情報が入力されるときには、CPU59は、タッチパネル71の検知があると判定する。つまり、CPU59は、ステップS110の判定結果をNoとし、ステップS104の処理に戻る。
Step S110 is a process of determining whether there is a detection on the touch panel. When the electronic pen 40 is not detected on the touch panel 71, the detection signal is not output from the touch panel 71, and the position coordinate information of the detection position is not output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 determines whether or not there is a detection on the touch panel 71 depending on whether or not position coordinate information of the detection position is input. When the position coordinate information of the detection position is not input, the CPU 59 determines that the touch panel 71 is not detected. That is, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S110 to Yes, and returns to the process in step S101. On the other hand, when the information of the position coordinates of the detection position is input, the CPU 59 determines that the touch panel 71 is detected. That is, the CPU 59 sets the determination result of step S110 to No, and returns to the process of step S104.
上述したステップS105の判定結果がNoとなる場合には、ステップS111に進む。
If the determination result of step S105 described above is No, the process proceeds to step S111.
ステップS111は、画像の縮小率を設定する処理である。ステップS105の判定結果でNoとなる場合、タッチパネル71における検知位置が画像の中心に近づく方向に移動している場合である。この場合、CPU59は、入力される検出位置の位置座標を用いて、画像の縮小率を設定する。画像処理回路54は、求めた縮小率の情報を用いて、表示している画像の元になる画像データに対して縮小処理を実行する。
Step S111 is a process for setting an image reduction ratio. When the determination result in step S105 is No, the detected position on the touch panel 71 is moving in a direction approaching the center of the image. In this case, the CPU 59 sets the image reduction ratio using the position coordinates of the input detection position. The image processing circuit 54 executes a reduction process on the image data that is the basis of the displayed image, using the obtained reduction ratio information.
ステップS112は、拡縮バー及び回転バーの再設定である。CPU59は、ステップS111にて設定された縮小率を用いて縮小される画像の大きさを推定する。CPU59は、縮小される画像の大きさと、編集画面の大きさとを比較する。この比較において、縮小される画像80の大きさが、編集画面内に収まる大きさとなる場合には、CPU59は、拡大される画像80の大きさに合わせて拡縮バー81,82,83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88を再設定する。一方、縮小される画像の大きさが、編集画面からはみ出す大きさとなる場合には、CPU59は、以下の処理を実行する。
Step S112 is resetting of the expansion / contraction bar and the rotation bar. The CPU 59 estimates the size of the image to be reduced using the reduction rate set in step S111. The CPU 59 compares the size of the image to be reduced with the size of the editing screen. In this comparison, when the size of the image 80 to be reduced is a size that can be accommodated in the editing screen, the CPU 59 adjusts the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84, and the size of the image 80 to be enlarged. The rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 are reset. On the other hand, when the size of the image to be reduced is a size that protrudes from the editing screen, the CPU 59 executes the following processing.
CPU59は、画像の頂点のいずれかが、編集画面内に含まれているか否かを判別する。画像の頂点のいずれかが編集画面内に含まれる場合には、CPU59は、縮小される画像のうち、編集画面に表示される辺及び頂点に合わせて拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する。一方、画像の頂点の全ての頂点が編集画面からはみ出している(外れている)場合には、CPU59は、縮小された画像のうち、編集画面に表示される領域に合わせて拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する。なお、再設定した拡縮バー及び回転バーの情報は、縮小処理が施された画像データとともに表示制御回路55によって読み出される。
The CPU 59 determines whether any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen. If any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the sides and vertices displayed on the editing screen in the reduced image. On the other hand, if all the vertices of the image are out of the editing screen (out of), the CPU 59 enlarges / reduces and rotates the bar in accordance with the area displayed on the editing screen in the reduced image. To reset. Note that the information on the reset enlargement / reduction bar and rotation bar is read by the display control circuit 55 together with the image data subjected to the reduction process.
ステップS113は、画像の縮小表示である。表示制御回路55は、入力される画像データに基づく画像を、先に表示されている画像と差し替えて表示する。この表示の際に、先に表示されている画像の中心Cと、縮小された画像の中心とが一致するように縮小された画像を表示する。また、表示制御回路55は、再設定した拡縮バー及び回転バーの情報に基づいて、画像の周縁部に操作バーのいずれかを表示する。なお、このステップS113の処理が行われると、ステップS109に進む。
Step S113 is a reduced display of the image. The display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the input image data by replacing the previously displayed image. At the time of this display, an image reduced so that the center C of the previously displayed image coincides with the center of the reduced image is displayed. Further, the display control circuit 55 displays one of the operation bars on the peripheral edge of the image based on the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar. When the process of step S113 is performed, the process proceeds to step S109.
これにより、タッチパネル71の操作によって画像が拡大又は縮小される。この画像の拡大及び縮小時に、編集画面に表示される画像の領域に応じて、拡縮バー及び回転バーが再設定される。
Thereby, the image is enlarged or reduced by the operation of the touch panel 71. When the image is enlarged or reduced, the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar are reset according to the area of the image displayed on the editing screen.
上述したステップS104の判定結果がNoとなる場合、ステップS115に進む。
If the determination result of step S104 described above is No, the process proceeds to step S115.
ステップS115は、タッチパネルの検知位置が回転バーの領域内であるか否かを判定する処理である。ステップS103の判定結果により、コントローラ56からCPU59にタッチパネル71によって検知された位置座標の情報が入力されている。CPU59は、コントローラ56から入力された位置座標が、回転バーのいずれかの位置座標の範囲に含まれるか否かを判定する。例えば、コントローラ56から入力された位置座標が、回転バーのいずれかの位置座標の範囲に含まれる場合には、CPU59は、ステップS115の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS116に進む。一方、コントローラ56から入力された位置座標が、回転バーのいずれかの位置座標の範囲に含まれない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS115の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS110に進む。
Step S115 is a process of determining whether or not the detection position of the touch panel is within the area of the rotation bar. Based on the determination result in step S103, the position coordinate information detected by the touch panel 71 is input from the controller 56 to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 determines whether or not the position coordinates input from the controller 56 are included in any position coordinate range of the rotation bar. For example, when the position coordinates input from the controller 56 are included in the range of any position coordinates of the rotation bar, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S115 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S116. On the other hand, when the position coordinate input from the controller 56 is not included in any position coordinate range of the rotation bar, the CPU 59 determines No in step S115. In this case, the process proceeds to step S110.
ステップS116は、タッチパネルの検知位置の移動があるか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ56から位置座標の情報が入力された場合には、CPU59は、タッチパネル71による検知があると判定する。この場合、ステップS117に進む。一方、コントローラ56から位置座標の情報が入力されない場合には、CPU59は、タッチパネル71による検知がないと判定する。この場合、ステップS116の判定結果がYesとなるまでステップS116の判定処理を実行する。
Step S116 is a process for determining whether or not the detection position of the touch panel has moved. When position coordinate information is input from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines that there is detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the process proceeds to step S117. On the other hand, when position coordinate information is not input from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines that there is no detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the determination process of step S116 is executed until the determination result of step S116 is Yes.
ステップS117は、画像の回転角度を設定する処理である。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力される位置座標の情報に基づいて、画像80の回転角度を設定する。画像処理回路54は、求めた回転角度の情報を用いて、表示している画像80の元になる画像データに対して回転処理を実行する。
Step S117 is a process for setting the rotation angle of the image. The CPU 59 sets the rotation angle of the image 80 based on the position coordinate information output from the controller 56. The image processing circuit 54 performs rotation processing on the image data that is the basis of the displayed image 80 using the information on the obtained rotation angle.
ステップS118は、拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する処理である。CPU59は、ステップS117にて設定された回転角度により回転される画像80が、編集画面に収まるか否かを判定する。この判定において、回転される画像が、編集画面内に収まる場合には、CPU59は、回転される画像に合わせて拡縮バー81,82,83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88を再設定する。一方、回転される画像80が、編集画面からはみ出す場合には、CPU59は、以下の処理を実行する。
Step S118 is a process for resetting the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar. The CPU 59 determines whether or not the image 80 rotated at the rotation angle set in step S117 fits on the editing screen. In this determination, if the rotated image fits within the editing screen, the CPU 59 re-scales the enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and the rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88 according to the rotated image. Set. On the other hand, when the rotated image 80 protrudes from the editing screen, the CPU 59 executes the following processing.
CPU59は、画像の頂点のいずれかが、編集画面内に含まれているか否かを判別する。画像の頂点のいずれかが編集画面内に含まれる場合には、CPU59は、回転される画像のうち、編集画面に含まれる辺及び頂点に合わせて拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する。一方、画像の頂点の全ての頂点が編集画面からはみ出している場合には、CPU59は、回転される画像のうち、編集画面に表示される領域に合わせて拡縮バー及び回転バーを再設定する。なお、再設定した拡縮バー及び回転バーの情報は、回転処理が施された画像データとともに表示制御回路55によって読み出される。
The CPU 59 determines whether any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen. When any of the vertices of the image is included in the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the sides and vertices included in the editing screen in the rotated image. On the other hand, when all the vertices of the image protrude from the editing screen, the CPU 59 resets the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar in accordance with the area displayed on the editing screen in the rotated image. It should be noted that the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar is read by the display control circuit 55 together with the image data subjected to the rotation process.
ステップS119は、画像の回転表示である。表示制御回路55は、表示装置66に表示される画像を、新たに取得した回転処理された画像に差し替える。このとき、新たに表示する画像の中心が、元の画像80の中心Cと一致するように表示する。また、表示制御回路55は、再設定した拡縮バー及び回転バーの情報に基づいて、画像の周縁部に操作バーのいずれかを表示する。
Step S119 is a rotation display of the image. The display control circuit 55 replaces the image displayed on the display device 66 with the newly acquired rotated image. At this time, the center of the newly displayed image is displayed so as to coincide with the center C of the original image 80. Further, the display control circuit 55 displays one of the operation bars on the peripheral edge of the image based on the reset information about the enlargement / reduction bar and the rotation bar.
ステップS120は、タッチパネルにおける検知位置が変化しているか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、タッチパネル71により電子ペン40が検知されると、コントローラ56により検知位置の位置座標が特定され、CPU59に検知位置の位置座標の情報が入力される。CPU59は、入力される検知位置の位置座標の情報を参照して、検知位置が変化しているか否かを判定する。タッチパネル71における検知位置が変化していない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS120の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS110に進む。
Step S120 is a process for determining whether or not the detection position on the touch panel has changed. As described above, when the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71, the position coordinate of the detection position is specified by the controller 56, and the position coordinate information of the detection position is input to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 refers to the input position coordinate information of the detection position to determine whether or not the detection position has changed. When the detection position on the touch panel 71 has not changed, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S120. In this case, the process proceeds to step S110.
一方、タッチパネル71における検知位置が変化している場合には、CPU59は、ステップS120の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS117に戻る。
On the other hand, if the detection position on the touch panel 71 has changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S120 to No. In this case, the process returns to step S117.
このようにして、画像の回転時においても、画像の回転角度に合わせて操作バーが再設定される。
In this way, even when the image is rotated, the operation bar is reset according to the rotation angle of the image.
次に、画像のトリミング処理について説明する。例えば、第1表示部25の編集画面に画像が表示される場合には、ユーザが意図する領域に沿って、電子ペン40を移動させると、その内側の領域がトリミングされる。例えば図16(a)に示すように、人物の画像110に対してトリミング処理を行う場合には、人物の領域に対して電子ペン40を移動させる(図16(b)参照)。そして、電子ペン40の移動が終了すると、その内側の領域が切り取られ、切り取られた領域に基づいた画像111が得られる(図16(c)参照)。
Next, the image trimming process will be described. For example, when an image is displayed on the editing screen of the first display unit 25, when the electronic pen 40 is moved along the region intended by the user, the inner region is trimmed. For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the trimming process is performed on the person image 110, the electronic pen 40 is moved with respect to the person area (see FIG. 16B). When the movement of the electronic pen 40 is completed, the inner area is cut out, and an image 111 based on the cut out area is obtained (see FIG. 16C).
ここで、トリミング処理の前において画像110を選択すると、矩形の画像110の外周に沿って操作バー(拡縮バー81,82,83,84及び回転バー85,86,87,88)が表示される(図16(d)参照)。一方、トリミング処理が施された画像に対しては、例えば、トリミングされた領域に外接するように矩形の操作バー(拡縮バー81”,82”,83”,84”及び回転バー85”,86”,87”,88”)が表示される(図16(e)参照)。なお、電子ペン40により矩形の領域をトリミングしていれば、トリミングされた矩形の領域の外周に沿って操作バーが表示される。
Here, when the image 110 is selected before the trimming process, operation bars (enlargement / reduction bars 81, 82, 83, 84 and rotation bars 85, 86, 87, 88) are displayed along the outer periphery of the rectangular image 110. (See FIG. 16D). On the other hand, for the trimmed image, for example, rectangular operation bars (enlargement / reduction bars 81 ″, 82 ″, 83 ″, 84 ″ and rotation bars 85 ″, 86 so as to circumscribe the trimmed area). ", 87", 88 ") is displayed (see FIG. 16E). If a rectangular area is trimmed with the electronic pen 40, an operation bar is displayed along the outer periphery of the trimmed rectangular area.
このトリミング処理においては、一旦実行したトリミング処理を再度やり直す場合もある。この場合、画像110のうち、先に実行されたトリミング処理により切り取られる領域(画像111に該当する領域)はそのまま表示し、トリミング処理により切り取られなかった他の領域(図16(f)斜線で示す領域)は半透明で表示する。そして、トリミング処理により得られた画像111に対する操作バー表示を解除し、元の画像110に対して操作バーを表示する(図16(f)参照)。なお、トリミング処理をやり直す場合には、トリミングされた領域に関するデータと、画像データとを関連付けて記憶しておけばよい。
In this trimming process, the trimming process once executed may be performed again. In this case, in the image 110, the area cut out by the previously performed trimming process (area corresponding to the image 111) is displayed as it is, and the other area that has not been cut out by the trimming process (FIG. 16 (f) with diagonal lines). The area shown) is translucent. Then, the operation bar display for the image 111 obtained by the trimming process is canceled, and the operation bar is displayed for the original image 110 (see FIG. 16F). When the trimming process is performed again, data relating to the trimmed area and image data may be stored in association with each other.
このような表示を行うことで、編集画面に表示する画像に対するトリミング処理を、異なる領域に設定し直すことができる。また、トリミング処理により削除された領域を半透明にて表示することで、一回実行されたトリミング処理における領域を確認しながら、トリミング処理を再度実行することが可能となる。
By performing such a display, the trimming process for the image displayed on the editing screen can be reset to a different area. Further, by displaying the area deleted by the trimming process in a translucent manner, it is possible to execute the trimming process again while confirming the area in the trimming process that has been executed once.
本実施形態では、拡縮バー及び回転バーからなる操作バーを制御ポイントとして用いる場合について説明しているが、これに限定される必要はなく、画像の各辺の端点及び中点となる位置に制御ポイントを設ける場合であっても、本発明を適用することができる。つまり、各辺の端部(頂点となる位置)に設けられる制御ポイントを、画像を回転させるための制御ポイントとし、各辺の中点に設けられる制御ポイントを、画像を拡大又は縮小させるための制御ポイントとすればよい。
In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which an operation bar including an enlargement / reduction bar and a rotation bar is used as a control point. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when a point is provided, the present invention can be applied. In other words, the control point provided at the end of each side (the position to be the vertex) is used as a control point for rotating the image, and the control point provided at the midpoint of each side is used for enlarging or reducing the image. It can be a control point.
近年、一般に普及される電子フォトアルバムの中には、画像を所定間隔で配置したものや、画像の一部を重ねて複数の画像を配置したものがある。画像の一部を重ねて複数の画像を配置した形態のフォトアルバムは、画像を所定間隔で配置したフォトアルバムに比べて、視覚的に効果的なものになりやすい。画像の一部を重ねて複数の画像を配置した場合、画像を重ね合わせた状態を認識できるように、重なり合う画像の階調を階層毎に調整して表示するものがある(特許3380692号公報)。
In recent years, electronic photo albums that are widely used include those in which images are arranged at predetermined intervals, and those in which a plurality of images are arranged by overlapping a part of images. A photo album in which a plurality of images are arranged by overlapping a part of images tends to be visually effective compared to a photo album in which images are arranged at predetermined intervals. When a plurality of images are arranged by overlapping a part of the images, there is a display that adjusts the gradation of the overlapping images for each layer so that the superimposed state can be recognized (Japanese Patent No. 3380692). .
このような表示方法において、例えば指定された画像の階層変数よりも小さい階層変数となる画像がある場合、他の階層変数を1インクリメントし、指定された画像の階層変数を0に変更することで、指定された画像が最上層となるように、階層構造を変更している。しかしながら、この方法では、3以上の画像を重ねたときの階層構造を変更する場合に、画像の指定を複数回繰り返し行う必要があり、面倒である。
In such a display method, for example, when there is an image that becomes a hierarchical variable smaller than the hierarchical variable of the designated image, the other hierarchical variable is incremented by 1 and the hierarchical variable of the designated image is changed to 0. The hierarchical structure is changed so that the designated image is the top layer. However, in this method, when changing the hierarchical structure when three or more images are overlapped, it is necessary to repeatedly specify the images a plurality of times, which is troublesome.
よって、本実施形態で例に取り上げた携帯型電子情報端末機に代表される画像編集装置は、複数の画像を重ねたときの階層構造を簡単な操作で容易に入れ替えることができることを目的としている。
Therefore, an image editing apparatus typified by the portable electronic information terminal taken as an example in the present embodiment aims to easily replace the hierarchical structure when a plurality of images are superimposed with a simple operation. .
以下、編集画面に3つの画像が重なって表示される場合に、3つの画像の画層のいずれかを入れ替える場合について説明する。画像を入れ替える操作は、例えば画像の一部を重ね合わせた状態で複数の画像を合成する場合に実行される処理である。なお、重ね合わせて表示する際には、各画像に対しては、画像の階層を示す表示順位が割り振られる。
Hereinafter, a case where one of the three image layers is replaced when three images are displayed on the editing screen in an overlapping manner will be described. The operation of exchanging images is a process executed when, for example, a plurality of images are combined with a part of the images superimposed. When the images are displayed in a superimposed manner, a display order indicating the image hierarchy is assigned to each image.
まず、2つの画像の表示順位を入れ替える場合の動作について説明する。図17に示すように、第1表示部25に表示される編集画面において、画像P1が画像P2の一部を被覆するように、つまり画像P1が最上層となるように配置されている場合を考える。つまり、この場合には、画像P1の表示順位が「1」、画像P2の表示順位が「2」となる。
First, the operation for switching the display order of two images will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25, the case where the image P1 is arranged so as to cover a part of the image P2, that is, the image P1 is the uppermost layer. Think. That is, in this case, the display order of the image P1 is “1”, and the display order of the image P2 is “2”.
まず、電子ペン40を用いて第1表示部25に表示された画像P2を選択する。ここで、画像の選択とは、電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41を第1表示部25の編集画面に表示される画像の領域に当接又は近接させることで実行される。この画像P2の選択の後、電子ペン40をy方向に移動させると、画像P2が電子ペン40の移動にあわせてy方向に移動する。画像P2の移動により、画像P1と画像P2との重ね合わせが一旦解除される。図18に示すように、電子ペン40の移動によって、画像P2の下端部が第1表示部25の編集画面の下端縁に当接される位置まで移動すると、2つの画像の表示順位の変更が許可される。
First, the image P2 displayed on the first display unit 25 is selected using the electronic pen 40. Here, the selection of the image is executed by bringing the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 into contact with or close to the area of the image displayed on the editing screen of the first display unit 25. If the electronic pen 40 is moved in the y direction after the selection of the image P2, the image P2 moves in the y direction in accordance with the movement of the electronic pen 40. Due to the movement of the image P2, the superposition of the image P1 and the image P2 is once released. As shown in FIG. 18, when the electronic pen 40 moves to move the lower end of the image P <b> 2 to a position where the lower end of the editing screen of the first display unit 25 comes into contact, the display order of the two images is changed. Allowed.
一方、画像P2の下端部が第1表示部25の編集画面の下端縁に当接される前に、電子ペン40と第1表示部25との当接又は近接が解除された場合には、2つの画像の表示順位の変更は許可されない。この場合、移動させた画像P2は、元の位置に自動的に戻してもよいし、電子ペン40と第1表示部25との当接又は近接が解除された位置に保持してもよい。
On the other hand, when the contact or proximity between the electronic pen 40 and the first display unit 25 is released before the lower end of the image P2 is brought into contact with the lower edge of the editing screen of the first display unit 25, Changing the display order of the two images is not permitted. In this case, the moved image P2 may be automatically returned to the original position, or may be held at a position where the contact or proximity between the electronic pen 40 and the first display unit 25 is released.
その後、電子ペン40を-y方向に移動させると、画像P2が、画像P1の一部を被覆するように移動する(図19参照)。つまり、画像P1、画像P2の表示順位が入れ替わる。つまり、画像P1の表示順位が「2」、画像P2の表示順位が「1」となる。このとき、画像P2の表示順位を入れ替える前の位置に戻す必要はなく、電子ペン40と第1表示部25との当接、或いは近接が解除されたときの位置に保持してもよい。なお、2つの画像の表示順位の変更が許可された直後に電子ペン40と第1表示部25との当接又は近接が解除された時には、画像P2の位置を重ね合わせた状態を解除する前の位置に自動的に戻るようにしてもよい。
Thereafter, when the electronic pen 40 is moved in the -y direction, the image P2 moves so as to cover a part of the image P1 (see FIG. 19). That is, the display order of the image P1 and the image P2 is switched. That is, the display order of the image P1 is “2”, and the display order of the image P2 is “1”. At this time, it is not necessary to return to the position before the display order of the image P2 is changed, and the electronic pen 40 and the first display unit 25 may be held at the position when the contact or proximity is released. Note that when the contact or proximity between the electronic pen 40 and the first display unit 25 is released immediately after the change of the display order of the two images is permitted, before the state in which the positions of the images P2 are overlapped is released. It is also possible to automatically return to the position.
なお、画像P2を移動させているが、画像P1を移動させて、画像P1及び画像P2の重ね合わせを解除し、画像P2と画像P1とを再度重ね合わせることも可能である。この場合、画像P1の表示順位は「1」、画像P2の表示順位は「2」であることから、この場合、画像P1の表示順位は「2」、画像P2の表示順位は「1」に変更される。
Although the image P2 is moved, it is also possible to move the image P1 to cancel the overlapping of the image P1 and the image P2, and to overlap the image P2 and the image P1 again. In this case, the display order of the image P1 is “1” and the display order of the image P2 is “2”. In this case, the display order of the image P1 is “2” and the display order of the image P2 is “1”. Be changed.
また、画像P2をy方向に移動させて編集画面の下端縁まで移動させているが、これに限定される必要はなく、編集画面の上端縁、左端縁、右端縁のいずれかまで移動させてもよい。
Further, the image P2 is moved in the y direction to the lower edge of the editing screen, but is not limited to this, and is moved to any of the upper edge, the left edge, or the right edge of the editing screen. Also good.
また、対象となる画像を編集画面の一端縁まで移動させる場合について説明しているが、これに限定される必要はなく、例えば他の画像との重ね合わせが解除された場合や、例えば他の画像との重ね合わせが解除された後、他の画像に対して一定距離離れた位置まで移動させる、又は、所定量移動(スライド)させたときに、画像の表示順位の変更が許可されるようにしてもよい。
Moreover, although the case where the target image is moved to one edge of the editing screen has been described, it is not necessary to be limited to this, for example, when the overlay with another image is canceled, for example, other After being overlaid with an image, changing the display order of the images is allowed when the image is moved to a position separated by a certain distance from another image or moved (slid) by a predetermined amount. It may be.
また、この他に、選択された画像を移動させるのではなく、第1表示部25に重なり合って表示される複数の画像のいずれかの画像を電子ペン40の入力操作により選択しただけで画像の表示順位を変更する、或いは、電子ペン40による入力操作が長押し操作となる場合に、選択された画像の表示順位を変更するようにしてもよい。
In addition to the above, instead of moving the selected image, only one of the plurality of images displayed in an overlapping manner on the first display unit 25 is selected by the input operation of the electronic pen 40. When the display order is changed or when the input operation with the electronic pen 40 is a long press operation, the display order of the selected images may be changed.
ここで、複数の画像が重なり合う場合、表示順位が高い画像は、表示順位が低い画像を被覆する。よって、表示順位が低い画像は、表示順位が高い画像に隠れた状態で表示されるのが一般的である。しかしながら、表示順位が低い画像は、表示順位が高い画像に隠れた状態で表示される必要はなく、例えば表示順位が低い画像が、表示順位が高い画像から透けて見えるように各画像を表示することも可能である。この場合、表示順位が高い画像に対してマスク処理を行い、該画像の透明度を変更する。このマスク処理は、画像全体、又は表示順位の低い画像と重なる領域のみに対して行えばよい。
Here, when a plurality of images overlap, an image with a high display order covers an image with a low display order. Therefore, an image with a low display order is generally displayed in a state hidden behind an image with a high display order. However, an image with a low display order does not need to be hidden in an image with a high display order. For example, each image is displayed so that an image with a low display order can be seen through from an image with a high display order. It is also possible. In this case, mask processing is performed on an image having a high display order, and the transparency of the image is changed. This masking process may be performed only on the entire image or only on an area overlapping with an image with a low display order.
次に、3つの画像の画層のいずれかを入れ替える場合の動作について説明する。図20に示すように、第1表示部25に表示される編集画面において、画像P3、画像P4、画像P5の3つの画像が表示されている場合について考える。このとき、画像P3の表示順位が「3」、画像P4の表示順位が「2」、画像P5の表示順位が「1」である場合を考える。
Next, the operation when replacing one of the three image layers will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, a case is considered where three images of an image P3, an image P4, and an image P5 are displayed on the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25. Consider a case where the display order of the image P3 is “3”, the display order of the image P4 is “2”, and the display order of the image P5 is “1”.
まず、電子ペン40を用いて第1表示部25に表示された画像P5を選択する。この画像P5の選択の後、電子ペン40を図21中G方向に移動させると、画像P5が電子ペン40の移動方向と同一方向に移動する。このとき、画像P4と画像P5との重ね合わせが一旦解除される。電子ペン40の移動により、画像P5の上端縁が編集画面の上端部に当接される位置まで移動すると、画像P5と他の画像との表示順位の変更が許可される。
First, the image P5 displayed on the first display unit 25 is selected using the electronic pen 40. When the electronic pen 40 is moved in the G direction in FIG. 21 after the selection of the image P5, the image P5 moves in the same direction as the movement direction of the electronic pen 40. At this time, the superposition of the image P4 and the image P5 is once released. When the electronic pen 40 moves to a position where the upper edge of the image P5 comes into contact with the upper edge of the editing screen, the display order of the image P5 and other images is allowed to be changed.
その後、電子ペン40を図22中H方向へ移動させると、画像P5が電子ペン40の移動方向と同一方向に移動する。そして、移動する画像P5を他の画像に近づけると、以下の処理が実行される。
Thereafter, when the electronic pen 40 is moved in the H direction in FIG. 22, the image P <b> 5 moves in the same direction as the movement direction of the electronic pen 40. Then, when the moving image P5 is brought close to another image, the following processing is executed.
例えば、画像P5の中心C5から画像P3の中心C3までの距離D1、画像P5の中心C5から画像P4の中心C4までの距離D2の双方が、予め設定された閾値以下となる場合には、移動させる画像P5が画像P3と画像P4との間に挿入される(図23参照)。つまり、画像P3の表示順位が「3」、画像P4の表示順位が「1」、画像P5の表示順位が「2」となるように変更される。
For example, when both the distance D1 from the center C5 of the image P5 to the center C3 of the image P3 and the distance D2 from the center C5 of the image P5 to the center C4 of the image P4 are equal to or less than a preset threshold value, the movement is performed. An image P5 to be inserted is inserted between the images P3 and P4 (see FIG. 23). That is, the display order of the image P3 is changed to “3”, the display order of the image P4 is “1”, and the display order of the image P5 is changed to “2”.
一方、画像P5の中心C5から画像P3の中心C3までの距離D1、画像P5の中心C5から画像P4の中心C4までの距離D2のいずれか一方が、予め設定された閾値以下となる場合について説明する。図24に示すように、画像P5を編集画面の上端縁に当接させた後、図24中J方向に移動させる。このときに、画像P5の中心C5から画像P3の中心C3までの距離D1が閾値以下となり、画像P5の中心C5から画像P4の中心C4までの距離D2が閾値を超過している場合を考える。このような場合、図25に示すように、移動させた画像P5を元の位置に移動させる(図25中K方向に移動させる)と、画像P5の一部が画像P4だけでなく、画像P3によって被覆された状態となる。この場合、画像P3の表示順位が「2」、画像P4の表示順位が「1」、画像P5の表示順位が「3」となる。このような場合には、画像P3と画像P5との表示順位が変更されるが、画像P3と画像P4との表示順位が変更されずに維持されるので、画像P4の表示順位が「1」となる。
On the other hand, a case where either one of the distance D1 from the center C5 of the image P5 to the center C3 of the image P3 and the distance D2 from the center C5 of the image P5 to the center C4 of the image P4 is equal to or less than a preset threshold value will be described. To do. As shown in FIG. 24, after the image P5 is brought into contact with the upper edge of the editing screen, it is moved in the J direction in FIG. At this time, a case is considered where the distance D1 from the center C5 of the image P5 to the center C3 of the image P3 is equal to or less than the threshold, and the distance D2 from the center C5 of the image P5 to the center C4 of the image P4 exceeds the threshold. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 25, when the moved image P5 is moved to the original position (moved in the K direction in FIG. 25), a part of the image P5 is not only the image P4 but also the image P3. It will be in the state covered by. In this case, the display order of the image P3 is “2”, the display order of the image P4 is “1”, and the display order of the image P5 is “3”. In such a case, the display order of the image P3 and the image P5 is changed, but the display order of the image P3 and the image P4 is maintained without being changed, so that the display order of the image P4 is “1”. It becomes.
次に、複数の画像の合成時の処理の流れを図26のフローチャートを用いて説明する。
Next, the flow of processing when combining a plurality of images will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
ステップS201は、画像を読み出す処理である。CPU59は、データメモリ61から画像データを読み出す。なお、データメモリ61から読み出される画像データは、電子ペン40により選択される画像データである。
Step S201 is a process of reading an image. The CPU 59 reads image data from the data memory 61. The image data read from the data memory 61 is image data selected by the electronic pen 40.
ステップS202は、読み出した画像を加工するか否かを判定する処理である。ここで、読み出した画像を加工するとは、例えば画像のトリミング処理や、階調補正などの画像処理などが挙げられる。電子ペン40による入力操作が画像を加工する旨の操作であれば、CPU59は、このステップS202の判定結果をYesとする。それ以外の操作の場合には、CPU59は、ステップS202の判定結果をNoとする。
Step S202 is processing for determining whether or not to process the read image. Here, processing the read image includes, for example, image trimming processing, image processing such as gradation correction, and the like. If the input operation with the electronic pen 40 is an operation for processing the image, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S202 to Yes. In the case of other operations, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S202 to No.
ステップS203は、画像を加工する処理である。CPU59は、ステップS201により指定された画像データをデータメモリ61から読み出し、表示制御回路55に出力する。表示制御回路55は、入力された画像データに基づく画像を表示装置70に表示する。その後、電子ペン40による操作にあわせて、第1表示部25の表示装置70に表示された画像に対する加工処理が実行される。なお、加工処理が施された画像データは、バッファメモリ53に一旦記憶される。
Step S203 is a process for processing an image. The CPU 59 reads the image data designated in step S201 from the data memory 61 and outputs it to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the input image data on the display device 70. Thereafter, in accordance with the operation with the electronic pen 40, the processing for the image displayed on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 is executed. The processed image data is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 53.
ステップS204は、他の画像の読み出しがないか否かを判定する処理である。電子ペン40による入力操作が他の画像を読み出す旨の操作でない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS204の判定結果をYesとし、ステップS205に進む。一方、電子ペン40による入力操作が他の画像を読み出す旨の操作の場合には、CPU59は、ステップS204の判定結果をNoとし、ステップS201に戻る。つまり、画像合成時に必要となる画像が全て読み出されるまで、ステップS201~ステップS204の処理が繰り返される。
Step S204 is a process for determining whether or not another image has been read. If the input operation with the electronic pen 40 is not an operation for reading another image, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S204 to Yes, and proceeds to step S205. On the other hand, if the input operation with the electronic pen 40 is an operation for reading out another image, the CPU 59 determines No in step S204 and returns to step S201. That is, the processes in steps S201 to S204 are repeated until all the images necessary for image composition are read out.
ステップS205は、画像を仮配置する処理である。表示制御回路55は、第1表示部25に表示される編集画面内に、ステップS201~ステップS204にて読み出した画像を仮配置する。この画像の仮配置は、画像合成用のテンプレートを用いて行ってもよいし、電子ペン40の操作により読み出した画像をユーザの意図する位置に配置することで、画像の仮配置を行うことも可能である。この際に、表示制御回路55は、読み出した画像を、画像の一部が重なり合うように、各画像を仮は位置する。そして、表示制御回路55は、仮配置される各画像に対して表示順位に関する情報を付与する。
Step S205 is a process for temporarily arranging images. The display control circuit 55 temporarily arranges the image read in step S201 to step S204 in the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25. The temporary placement of the image may be performed using a template for image composition, or the temporary placement of the image may be performed by placing the image read by the operation of the electronic pen 40 at a position intended by the user. Is possible. At this time, the display control circuit 55 temporarily positions each read image so that a part of the image overlaps. Then, the display control circuit 55 gives information related to the display order to each temporarily arranged image.
ステップS206は、画像の表示順位を変更する処理である。このステップS206の処理は、電子ペン40の操作により編集画面内の画像のいずれかを移動させることで実行される。
Step S206 is a process for changing the display order of the images. The processing in step S206 is executed by moving any of the images in the editing screen by operating the electronic pen 40.
ステップS207は、画像の配置を微調整する処理である。電子ペン40の入力スイッチ41が第1表示部25に当接又は近接されると、タッチパネル71により検知される。このタッチパネル71による検知を受けて、コントローラ56は、電子ペン40の位置座標の情報を取得する。CPU59は、コントローラ56によって取得された位置座標の情報から、表示装置70に表示される画像を特定する。第1表示部25に当接又は近接される電子ペン40が移動すると、CPU59には、検知される電子ペン40の位置座標の情報が入力される。CPU59は、電子ペン40の移動方向及び移動量を求め、求めた電子ペン40の移動方向及び移動量を表示制御回路55に出力する。表示制御回路55は、電子ペン40の移動方向及び移動量に基づいて選択された画像を移動させる。このようにして、第1表示部25に表示される画像のそれぞれの位置が微調整される。
Step S207 is a process for finely adjusting the arrangement of the images. When the input switch 41 of the electronic pen 40 comes into contact with or comes close to the first display unit 25, it is detected by the touch panel 71. In response to the detection by the touch panel 71, the controller 56 acquires the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40. The CPU 59 specifies an image to be displayed on the display device 70 from the position coordinate information acquired by the controller 56. When the electronic pen 40 that is in contact with or close to the first display unit 25 moves, information on the position coordinates of the detected electronic pen 40 is input to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 obtains the movement direction and movement amount of the electronic pen 40 and outputs the obtained movement direction and movement amount of the electronic pen 40 to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 moves the image selected based on the moving direction and moving amount of the electronic pen 40. In this way, the position of each image displayed on the first display unit 25 is finely adjusted.
ステップS208は、画像を記録する処理である。CPU59は、ステップS207の処理が実行されたときの各画像の位置座標の情報と表示順位の情報とを取得し、画像処理回路54に出力する。画像処理回路54は、表示した画像の元になる画像データをデータメモリ61から読み出す。そして、画像処理回路54は、これら画像データを各画像の位置座標の情報と表示順位の情報に基づいて合成する。そして、画像処理回路54は、合成された画像データを、例えばJPEG形式の画像データとしてデータメモリ61に記録する。
Step S208 is a process of recording an image. The CPU 59 acquires the position coordinate information and the display order information of each image when the process of step S207 is executed, and outputs it to the image processing circuit 54. The image processing circuit 54 reads out the image data that is the basis of the displayed image from the data memory 61. Then, the image processing circuit 54 synthesizes these image data based on the position coordinate information and display order information of each image. Then, the image processing circuit 54 records the combined image data in the data memory 61 as, for example, JPEG format image data.
なお、図26のフローチャートにおいてはステップS201~ステップS204の処理を行うことで、画像をデータメモリ61から読み出しているが、これに限定される必要はなく、第2表示部28のライブラリ画面に表示される画像を第2表示部28から第1表示部25に複数移動させてもよい。
In the flowchart of FIG. 26, the image is read from the data memory 61 by performing the processing of step S201 to step S204. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed on the library screen of the second display unit 28. A plurality of images may be moved from the second display unit 28 to the first display unit 25.
次に、画像の表示順位を変更する処理について、図27のフローチャートに基づいて説明する。
Next, processing for changing the display order of images will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.
ステップS301は、表示順位を変更する画像(以下、対象画像)の選択があるか否かを判定する処理である。電子ペン40をタッチパネル71に当接又は近接させると、タッチパネル71が電子ペン40の位置を検知し、検知信号をコントローラ56に出力する。コントローラ56は、タッチパネル71から出力される検知信号から位置座標の情報を取得する。取得される電子ペン40の位置座標の情報は、CPU59に出力される。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力された電子ペン40の位置座標の情報と表示装置70に表示される画像の位置情報とから、電子ペン40が検知された位置にある画像を特定する。電子ペン40が検知される位置に画像があるか否かによって、対象画像の選択があるか否かが判定される。例えば、電子ペン40が検知される位置に画像がある場合には、CPU59は、ステップS301の判定結果をYesとし、ステップS302に進む。一方、電子ペン40が検知される位置に画像がない場合や、電子ペン40の検知がない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS301の判定結果をNoとし、このフローチャートを終了させる。
Step S301 is a process of determining whether or not an image whose display order is to be changed (hereinafter referred to as a target image) is selected. When the electronic pen 40 is brought into contact with or close to the touch panel 71, the touch panel 71 detects the position of the electronic pen 40 and outputs a detection signal to the controller 56. The controller 56 acquires position coordinate information from the detection signal output from the touch panel 71. The acquired position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 is output to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 specifies the image at the position where the electronic pen 40 is detected from the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 output from the controller 56 and the position information of the image displayed on the display device 70. Whether or not there is a selection of the target image is determined depending on whether or not there is an image at a position where the electronic pen 40 is detected. For example, if there is an image at the position where the electronic pen 40 is detected, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S301 to Yes, and proceeds to step S302. On the other hand, if there is no image at the position where the electronic pen 40 is detected, or if there is no detection of the electronic pen 40, the CPU 59 determines No in step S301 and ends this flowchart.
ステップS302は、対象画像を移動させる処理である。電子ペン40を移動させると、タッチパネル71は移動する電子ペン40の位置を検知する。コントローラ56は、タッチパネル71からの検知信号に基づき、電子ペン40の位置座標の情報を取得する。この位置座標の情報は、CPU59に入力される。CPU59は、対象画像の情報と、入力される位置座標の情報とを、表示制御回路55に出力する。これを受けて、表示制御回路55は、対象画像の情報と位置座標の情報とに基づいて、表示装置70に表示される対象画像の位置を移動させる。これにより、タッチパネル71に当接又は近接された電子ペン40を移動させると、電子ペン40の移動に合わせて対象画像が同一方向に移動する。
Step S302 is a process of moving the target image. When the electronic pen 40 is moved, the touch panel 71 detects the position of the moving electronic pen 40. The controller 56 acquires the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 based on the detection signal from the touch panel 71. Information on the position coordinates is input to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 outputs the target image information and the input position coordinate information to the display control circuit 55. In response to this, the display control circuit 55 moves the position of the target image displayed on the display device 70 based on the information on the target image and the information on the position coordinates. Accordingly, when the electronic pen 40 that is in contact with or close to the touch panel 71 is moved, the target image moves in the same direction as the electronic pen 40 moves.
ステップS303は、画像が画面端部まで移動したか否かを判定する処理である。CPU59は、表示装置70に表示される編集画面の大きさ(四隅の位置座標)及び対象画像の大きさ(画像の四隅の位置座標)の情報を取得する。また、上述したように、コントローラ56から位置座標の情報が入力される。CPU59は、これら情報から、移動する対象画像が編集画面の端部に到達しているか否かを判定する。移動する対象画像が編集画面の端部に到達している場合には、CPU59は、対象画像が画面端部まで移動したと判定する。この場合、ステップS303の判定結果がYesとなり、ステップS304に進む。一方、移動する対象画像が編集画面の端部に到達していない場合には、CPU59は、対象画像が画面端部まで移動していないと判定する。この場合、ステップS303の判定結果がNoとなる。この場合、ステップS306に進む。
Step S303 is processing for determining whether or not the image has moved to the edge of the screen. The CPU 59 acquires information on the size of the editing screen (positional coordinates of the four corners) displayed on the display device 70 and the size of the target image (positional coordinates of the four corners of the image). Further, as described above, position coordinate information is input from the controller 56. From these pieces of information, the CPU 59 determines whether or not the moving target image has reached the end of the editing screen. If the target image to be moved has reached the end of the editing screen, the CPU 59 determines that the target image has moved to the end of the screen. In this case, the determination result of step S303 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S304. On the other hand, if the target image to be moved has not reached the end of the editing screen, the CPU 59 determines that the target image has not moved to the end of the screen. In this case, the determination result of step S303 is No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S306.
ステップS304は、表示順位の変更を許可する処理である。図17に示すように、画像P1の一部が他の画像P2に被覆されるなど、対象画像が他の画像と重なるように配置されている場合、CPU59は、ステップS303の判定結果をYesとすることで、画像の表示順位を入れ替えることを許可する。そして、CPU59は、移動する対象画像の表示順位の情報と、対象画像と重なるように配置された他の画像の表示順位の情報と入れ替える処理を実行する。
Step S304 is a process of permitting the display order to be changed. As illustrated in FIG. 17, when the target image is arranged so as to overlap with another image, such as a part of the image P1 is covered with another image P2, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S303 as Yes. By doing this, it is permitted to change the display order of the images. Then, the CPU 59 executes a process of replacing the display order information of the moving target image with the display order information of other images arranged so as to overlap the target image.
ステップS305は、対象画像を再配置する処理である。上述したように、電子ペン40の移動は、タッチパネル71により検知され、また、その電子ペン40が検知される位置座標はコントローラ56によって取得される。CPU59は、コントローラ56により取得される位置座標の情報と、対象画像の情報とを表示制御回路55に出力する。これを受けて、表示制御回路55は、入力される位置座標の情報に基づいて、対象画像の位置を移動させた状態で表示装置70に表示する。ステップS304において、対象画像の表示順位と、他の画像の表示順位とを入れ替える処理を行っている。この処理を行っていることで、対象画像と他の画像とが重なるように対象画像を移動させると、対象画像によって、他の画像の一部が被覆された状態で再配置される。
Step S305 is processing for rearranging the target images. As described above, the movement of the electronic pen 40 is detected by the touch panel 71, and the position coordinates at which the electronic pen 40 is detected are acquired by the controller 56. The CPU 59 outputs the position coordinate information acquired by the controller 56 and the target image information to the display control circuit 55. In response to this, the display control circuit 55 displays the target image on the display device 70 in a state where the position of the target image has been moved based on the input position coordinate information. In step S304, a process of switching the display order of the target image and the display order of other images is performed. By performing this process, when the target image is moved so that the target image and another image overlap each other, the target image is rearranged in a state where a part of the other image is covered.
ステップS303の判定結果で、対象画像を画面端部まで移動させていないと判定された場合は、ステップS306に進む。
If it is determined in step S303 that the target image has not been moved to the screen edge, the process proceeds to step S306.
ステップS306は、表示順位の変更を中止するか否かを判定する処理である。このステップS306の判定処理は、電子ペン40の操作に基づいて実行される。対象画像を画面端部まで移動させる前に、電子ペン40とタッチパネル71との当接又は近接が解除されると、タッチパネル71による電子ペン40の検知が終了する。CPU59は、対象画像が画面端部にまで到達していない状態で、コントローラ56からの位置座標の情報が入力されるか否かによって、ステップS306の判定結果を実行する。例えば、電子ペン40の位置座標の情報が入力されない場合には、CPU59は、画像の表示順位の変更を中止するものと判断する。この場合、CPU59は、ステップS306の判定結果をYesとし、ステップS301に戻る。このとき、CPU59は、表示制御回路55に対象画像を元の位置に戻す旨を示す信号を出力する。この信号を受けて、表示制御回路55は、対象画像を元の位置に移動させる。なお、対象画像を元の位置に移動させずに、電子ペン40の検出が終了した位置に保持してもよい。
Step S306 is a process for determining whether or not to stop changing the display order. The determination process in step S306 is executed based on the operation of the electronic pen 40. If the contact or proximity between the electronic pen 40 and the touch panel 71 is released before the target image is moved to the screen edge, the detection of the electronic pen 40 by the touch panel 71 ends. The CPU 59 executes the determination result of step S306 depending on whether or not position coordinate information is input from the controller 56 in a state where the target image has not reached the screen edge. For example, when the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 is not input, the CPU 59 determines that the change of the image display order is to be stopped. In this case, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S306 to Yes, and returns to step S301. At this time, the CPU 59 outputs a signal indicating that the target image is returned to the original position to the display control circuit 55. Upon receiving this signal, the display control circuit 55 moves the target image to the original position. Note that the target image may be held at the position where the detection of the electronic pen 40 is completed without being moved to the original position.
一方、電子ペン40の位置座標の情報がコントローラ56からCPU59に入力されていれば、CPU59は、表示順位の変更を中止しないものと判断する。この場合、CPU59は、ステップS306の判定結果をNoとし、ステップS303に戻る。
On the other hand, if the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 is input from the controller 56 to the CPU 59, the CPU 59 determines that the change of the display order is not stopped. In this case, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S306 to No, and returns to step S303.
このようにして、対象となる画像を編集画面の端縁まで移動させることで、対象となる画像と、他の画像との表示順位を入れ替えることができる。
In this way, the display order of the target image and other images can be switched by moving the target image to the edge of the editing screen.
最後に、対象画像を再配置する処理の流れを図28のフローチャートに基づいて説明する。
Finally, the flow of processing for rearranging the target image will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.
ステップS401は、対象画像を他の画像に向けて移動させる処理である。電子ペン40を移動させると、タッチパネル71は移動する電子ペン40の位置を検知する。コントローラ56は、タッチパネル71からの検知信号に基づき、電子ペン40の位置座標の情報を取得する。この位置座標の情報は、CPU59に入力される。CPU59は、対象画像の情報と入力される位置座標の情報とを、表示制御回路55に出力する。これを受けて、表示制御回路55は、対象画像の情報と位置座標の情報とに基づいて、表示装置70に表示される対象画像の位置を移動させる。これにより、タッチパネル71に当接又は近接された電子ペン40を移動させると、電子ペン40の移動に合わせて対象画像が同一方向に移動する。
Step S401 is a process of moving the target image toward another image. When the electronic pen 40 is moved, the touch panel 71 detects the position of the moving electronic pen 40. The controller 56 acquires the position coordinate information of the electronic pen 40 based on the detection signal from the touch panel 71. Information on the position coordinates is input to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 outputs the target image information and the input position coordinate information to the display control circuit 55. In response to this, the display control circuit 55 moves the position of the target image displayed on the display device 70 based on the information on the target image and the information on the position coordinates. Accordingly, when the electronic pen 40 that is in contact with or close to the touch panel 71 is moved, the target image moves in the same direction as the electronic pen 40 moves.
ステップS402は、対象画像が他の画像の近傍まで移動したか否かを判定する処理である。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力される位置座標の情報と、他の画像の位置座標とを参照して、対象画像が他の画像の近傍まで移動したか否かを判定する。CPU59は、例えば対象画素の中心から、他の画像の中心までの距離を画像毎に算出する。そして、CPU59は、画像毎に算出される距離のいずれかが、このステップS402における判定用の閾値以下となる場合に、対象画像が他の画像の近傍まで移動したと判定する。対象画像が他の画像の近傍まで移動した場合には、CPU59は、ステップS402の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS403に進む。一方、対象画像が他の画像の近傍まで移動していない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS402の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS401に戻る。
Step S402 is processing for determining whether or not the target image has moved to the vicinity of another image. The CPU 59 refers to the position coordinate information output from the controller 56 and the position coordinates of another image to determine whether or not the target image has moved to the vicinity of the other image. For example, the CPU 59 calculates a distance from the center of the target pixel to the center of another image for each image. Then, the CPU 59 determines that the target image has moved to the vicinity of another image when any of the distances calculated for each image is equal to or less than the determination threshold value in step S402. When the target image has moved to the vicinity of another image, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S402. In this case, the process proceeds to step S403. On the other hand, when the target image has not moved to the vicinity of another image, the CPU 59 determines No in step S402. In this case, the process returns to step S401.
ステップS403は、所定距離内に2つの画像があるか否かを判定する処理である。ステップS402の処理において、CPU59は、対象画像の中心と、他の画像の中心との距離を画像毎に算出している。CPU59は、対象画像の中心からの距離が閾値以下となる画像が2つ以上あるか否かを判定する。例えば対象画像の中心からの距離が閾値以下となる画像が2つある場合、CPU59は、このステップS403の判定結果をYesとし、ステップS404に進む。
Step S403 is processing for determining whether there are two images within a predetermined distance. In the process of step S402, the CPU 59 calculates the distance between the center of the target image and the center of another image for each image. The CPU 59 determines whether there are two or more images whose distance from the center of the target image is equal to or less than a threshold value. For example, when there are two images whose distance from the center of the target image is equal to or less than the threshold, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S403 to Yes, and proceeds to step S404.
ステップS404は、対象画像の表示順位を2つの画像の表示順位の間に変更する処理である。CPU59は、対象画像に近接する2つの画像の表示順位に関わる情報を参照する。そして、CPU59は、対象画像の表示順位が、対象画像に近接する2つの画像の表示順位の間に位置するように、各画像の表示順位を変更する。この表示順位の変更に基づいて、移動させた対象画像を、近接する2つの画像の間に挿入する。図22及び図23に示すように、画像P5を対象画像としたときには、画像P3と画像P4との間に画像P5が挿入されるように、各画像の表示順位が入れ替えられ、入れ替えられた表示順位に従って画像P5が配置される。
Step S404 is a process of changing the display order of the target images between the display orders of the two images. The CPU 59 refers to information related to the display order of two images close to the target image. Then, the CPU 59 changes the display order of each image so that the display order of the target image is located between the display orders of two images close to the target image. Based on this change in the display order, the moved target image is inserted between two adjacent images. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, when the image P5 is the target image, the display order of each image is changed so that the image P5 is inserted between the image P3 and the image P4, and the display is changed. The image P5 is arranged according to the order.
一方、ステップS403の判定処理において、所定距離内に2つの画像がない場合、CPU59は、このステップS403の判定結果をNoとし、ステップS405に進む。
On the other hand, in the determination process of step S403, if there are no two images within the predetermined distance, the CPU 59 sets the determination result of this step S403 to No, and proceeds to step S405.
ステップS405は、対象画像及び近接する画像の表示順位を変更する処理である。CPU59は、ステップS403の判定処理において、所定範囲内となる画像を特定している。CPU59は、対象画像に近接する画像の表示順位の情報を参照する。そして、CPU59は、対象画像の表示順位と、対象画像に近接する画像の表示順位とをそれぞれ変更する。これら画像の表示順位のそれぞれを変更することにより、対象画像を移動させると、近接する2つの画像の間に対象画像が挿入される。図24及び図25に示すように、画像P5が画像P3と近接していれば、画像P5の表示順位と画像P3の表示順位とがそれぞれ変更される。したがって、移動させた画像P5の一部が画像P3に被覆されるように画像P5が配置される。
Step S405 is a process of changing the display order of the target image and the adjacent image. The CPU 59 identifies an image that falls within a predetermined range in the determination process in step S403. The CPU 59 refers to information on the display order of images close to the target image. Then, the CPU 59 changes the display order of the target image and the display order of images close to the target image. When the target image is moved by changing the display order of these images, the target image is inserted between two adjacent images. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, if the image P5 is close to the image P3, the display order of the image P5 and the display order of the image P3 are respectively changed. Therefore, the image P5 is arranged so that a part of the moved image P5 is covered with the image P3.
このように、目的の画像を画面の端部まで移動させることで、画面内に配置される画像の表示順位を入れ替えることが許可され、また、目的の画像を、表示順位を入れ替える他の画像に近づけることで、自動的に目的の画像と、他の画像との表示順位が入れ替えられる。これによれば、例えば複数の画像を重ねて合成する場合において、簡単な操作で、合成する画像の表示順位を入れ替えることができる。
Thus, by moving the target image to the edge of the screen, it is allowed to change the display order of the images arranged in the screen, and the target image is changed to another image whose display order is changed. By bringing them closer, the display order of the target image and other images are automatically switched. According to this, for example, when a plurality of images are superimposed and combined, the display order of the images to be combined can be switched with a simple operation.
また、文章や画像の閲覧を行うことができる携帯電話機やタブレット端末機などの電子情報端末機が種々提供されている。このような電子情報端末機では、画像や文章の閲覧の際に、表示部に設けられたタッチパネルへの入力操作により、画像の切り替えや頁めくりなどが実行される。また、近年では、ペン型のポインティングデバイスを用いたタッチパネルへの入力操作により、文字を手書き入力操作することができるものも提供されている(特開2000-163193号公報参照)。このような入力操作を行えるようにすることで、ユーザは本を読む、文字や描画を書く動作を、電子情報端末機を用いて体感することができる。
In addition, various electronic information terminals such as mobile phones and tablet terminals capable of browsing texts and images are provided. In such an electronic information terminal, when browsing an image or text, an image is switched or pages are turned by an input operation on a touch panel provided in the display unit. In recent years, there has also been provided a device in which characters can be input by handwriting by an input operation on a touch panel using a pen-type pointing device (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-163193). By enabling such an input operation, the user can experience the operation of reading a book and writing characters and drawing using an electronic information terminal.
しかしながら、このような電子情報端末機においては、入力した文字や描画を削除する、又は入力した文字や描画を他の電子情報端末機に送信するときには、予め対応付けられた操作ボタンを操作するのが一般的である。このため、これら操作を行う場合には、実際の動作を携帯型電子情報端末機上で体感することができない。よって、本発明の携帯型電子情報端末機では、実際の動作を端末機上で体感することを目的としている。
However, in such an electronic information terminal, when an input character or drawing is deleted or an input character or drawing is transmitted to another electronic information terminal, an operation button associated in advance is operated. Is common. For this reason, when performing these operations, the actual operation cannot be experienced on the portable electronic information terminal. Therefore, the portable electronic information terminal of the present invention aims to experience actual operation on the terminal.
上述したように、本発明の携帯型電子情報端末機10は、第1表示部25に表示される編集画面として表示されるページに対して、手書き入力を行う操作(以下、手書き入力操作)の他に、手書き入力されたページを切り離す操作とを実行することができる。ここで、手書き入力されたページを切り離す操作は、実際の手帳においては、ページを破く動作に該当する。ここで、ページを切り離す入力操作は、手書き入力した内容を他のユーザに送信する場合や、手書き入力した内容を削除する場合に実行される。
As described above, the portable electronic information terminal 10 of the present invention performs an operation (hereinafter referred to as a handwriting input operation) for performing handwriting input on a page displayed as an editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25. In addition, it is possible to execute an operation of separating a page input by handwriting. Here, the operation of separating the page input by handwriting corresponds to the operation of breaking the page in an actual notebook. Here, the input operation for separating the pages is executed when the content input by handwriting is transmitted to another user or when the content input by handwriting is deleted.
図29に示すように、第1表示部25に編集画面として表示されるページは、電子ペン40を用いて手書き入力操作を行う領域A1と、ページを切り離す入力操作を行う領域A2とから構成される。手書き入力操作を行う領域A1においては、手書き入力操作の他、画像やイラスト画像の配置を行う操作が可能である。一方、ページを切り離す入力操作を行う領域A2においては、第1表示部25の上端部から下端部(図29中y方向)への電子ペン40の移動、又は第1表示部25の下端部から上端部(図29中-y方向)への電子ペン40の移動による入力操作のみが可能となる。ページを切り離す入力操作を行う領域A2において、第1表示部25の上端部から下端部への電子ペン40の移動が中断される場合には、この入力操作は無効となる。ここで、ページを切り離す入力操作を行う領域A2は、第1表示部25に表示してもよいし、非表示としてもよい。
As shown in FIG. 29, the page displayed as the editing screen on the first display unit 25 is composed of an area A1 for performing a handwriting input operation using the electronic pen 40 and an area A2 for performing an input operation for separating the pages. The In the area A1 where the handwriting input operation is performed, in addition to the handwriting input operation, an operation for arranging an image or an illustration image is possible. On the other hand, in the area A2 where the input operation for separating pages is performed, the electronic pen 40 is moved from the upper end of the first display unit 25 to the lower end (y direction in FIG. 29) or from the lower end of the first display unit 25. Only an input operation by moving the electronic pen 40 toward the upper end (-y direction in FIG. 29) can be performed. When the movement of the electronic pen 40 from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the first display unit 25 is interrupted in the area A2 where the input operation for separating pages is performed, this input operation is invalid. Here, the area A2 where the input operation for separating pages is performed may be displayed on the first display unit 25 or may not be displayed.
また、ページを切り離す入力操作を行う領域A2を設けているが、これに限定される必要はなく、ページを切り離すことができる位置を示すミシン目を表示することも可能である。図30(a)に示すように、第1表示部25の左側端部に、図30(a)中y方向に沿った直線からなるミシン目120を表示する。この場合、ユーザは、ミシン目70の上端部、又は下端部に電子ペン40を第1表示部25に当接させた後、電子ペン40をミシン目120に沿って移動させればよい。また、ミシン目は、1つとする必要はなく、2つ以上のミシン目を表示することも可能である。
In addition, although the area A2 for performing an input operation for separating the page is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display a perforation indicating a position where the page can be separated. As shown in FIG. 30A, a perforation 120 formed of a straight line along the y direction in FIG. 30A is displayed on the left end portion of the first display unit 25. In this case, the user may move the electronic pen 40 along the perforation 120 after bringing the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25 at the upper end or the lower end of the perforation 70. The number of perforations is not necessarily one, and two or more perforations can be displayed.
また、ミシン目を、図30(a)中y方向に沿った直線としているが、これに限定される必要はなく、図30(b)中x方向に沿った直線としてもよい。この場合、y方向に沿った直線からなるミシン目120と、一端がミシン目120と交わるx方向に伸びる直線からなるミシン目121とを表示することも可能である。なお、x方向に伸びる直線からなるミシン目121の数は、1つに限定される必要はなく、2以上設けることも可能である。
Further, the perforation is a straight line along the y direction in FIG. 30A, but is not limited to this, and may be a straight line along the x direction in FIG. 30B. In this case, it is also possible to display a perforation 120 composed of a straight line along the y direction and a perforation 121 composed of a straight line extending in the x direction, one end of which intersects the perforation 120. Note that the number of perforations 121 formed of straight lines extending in the x direction is not limited to one, and two or more perforations 121 may be provided.
以下、手書き入力された内容をユーザの意図する相手に送信する際の操作を説明する。図31(a)に示すように、編集画面として表示されるページの領域A1に対して、ユーザが電子ペン40を用いて手書き入力操作を行うと、手書き入力操作に基づいた文字や文章が編集画面に表示される。この手書き入力操作が行われた後、ユーザは、電子ペン40を編集画面の領域A2の上端部に当接させる。その後、ユーザは電子ペン40を第1表示部25の上端部から下端部に(図中y方向に)移動させる。電子ペン40を移動させると、第1表示部25には、ページを切り離す(破く)様子を示す動画表示が実行される。ページを切り離す様子を示す動画表示が実行された後、切り離されたページ125が第1表示部25に表示される(図31(b)参照)。なお、電子ペン40を、編集画面の領域A2の上端部から下端部に向けて移動させているが、これに限定される必要はなく、編集画面の領域A2の下端部から上端部に向けて移動させても、同様にして、ページを切り離すことができる。
Hereinafter, the operation when transmitting the contents input by handwriting to the user's intended partner will be described. As shown in FIG. 31A, when a user performs a handwriting input operation on the area A1 of the page displayed as the editing screen using the electronic pen 40, characters and sentences based on the handwriting input operation are edited. Displayed on the screen. After this handwriting input operation is performed, the user brings the electronic pen 40 into contact with the upper end portion of the area A2 of the editing screen. Thereafter, the user moves the electronic pen 40 from the upper end portion of the first display unit 25 to the lower end portion (in the y direction in the figure). When the electronic pen 40 is moved, the first display unit 25 performs a moving image display showing a state of separating (breaking) the page. After moving image display showing a state of separating pages is performed, the separated page 125 is displayed on the first display unit 25 (see FIG. 31B). Note that the electronic pen 40 is moved from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the area A2 on the editing screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is directed from the lower end portion to the upper end portion of the area A2 on the editing screen. Even if moved, the page can be separated in the same manner.
図31(b)に示すように、切り離されたページ125が第1表示部25に表示されると、第2表示部28には送信先のアドレス一覧が表示される。ここで、第2表示部28に表示される送信先のアドレス一覧は、自動的に表示されることが望ましいが、ユーザが電子ペン40を用いてアドレス一覧を表示させるようにしてもよい。送信先となるアドレス一覧が第2表示部28に表示されると、ユーザは、電子ペン40を用いて意図する相手のアドレスを選択する。相手のアドレスを選択すると、第1表示部25には、切り離されたページ125が折りたたまれ、封をされる様子を示す動画像が表示される。その後、封をされたページ125が裏返され封筒126として表示される。このとき、封筒126には、送信先となる相手の氏名とアドレスとが付されている(図32参照)。
As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the separated page 125 is displayed on the first display unit 25, a destination address list is displayed on the second display unit 28. Here, the destination address list displayed on the second display unit 28 is desirably displayed automatically, but the user may display the address list using the electronic pen 40. When the address list as the transmission destination is displayed on the second display unit 28, the user uses the electronic pen 40 to select the intended partner's address. When the address of the other party is selected, the first display unit 25 displays a moving image indicating that the separated page 125 is folded and sealed. Thereafter, the sealed page 125 is turned over and displayed as an envelope 126. At this time, the name and address of the other party as the transmission destination are attached to the envelope 126 (see FIG. 32).
図32に示すように、ユーザが電子ペン40を第1表示部25に当接させた後、電子ペン40を第1表示部25の上端側に(図32中矢印の方向)に払う操作を行う。この電子ペン40の動作を受けて、封筒126が相手に送信される様子を示す動画像が第1表示部25に表示される。なお、この表示の後、手書き入力されていないページが編集画面として表示される。
As shown in FIG. 32, after the user brings the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25, an operation of paying the electronic pen 40 toward the upper end side of the first display unit 25 (in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 32). Do. In response to the operation of the electronic pen 40, a moving image showing how the envelope 126 is transmitted to the other party is displayed on the first display unit 25. Note that after this display, a page that has not been handwritten is displayed as an editing screen.
上述したように、ページ125を切り離す操作は、手書き入力した内容をメールとして送信する場合の他、手書き入力を行った内容を削除する場合にも実行される。
As described above, the operation of separating the page 125 is executed not only when the content input by handwriting is transmitted as an email but also when the content input by handwriting is deleted.
手書き入力を行った内容を削除する場合も、第1表示部25に表示されたページの領域A2の上端部に電子ペン40を当接させ、領域A2の下端部に向けて移動させる。これにより、文字や文章を手書き入力されたページが切り離され、切り離されたページ75が第1表示部25に表示される(図31(b)参照)。
Also when deleting the contents of handwritten input, the electronic pen 40 is brought into contact with the upper end of the area A2 of the page displayed on the first display unit 25 and moved toward the lower end of the area A2. As a result, the page in which characters and sentences are input by handwriting is separated, and the separated page 75 is displayed on the first display unit 25 (see FIG. 31B).
図33(a)に示すように、切り離されたページ125が第1表示部25に表示された後、ユーザは、電子ペン40を用いて、切り離されたページ125が表示される領域内に「×」を手書き入力する。この電子ペン40の入力操作に基づいて、切り離されたページ125には例えば「×」が書かれた状態で表示される(図33(b)参照)。
As illustrated in FIG. 33A, after the separated page 125 is displayed on the first display unit 25, the user uses the electronic pen 40 to display “ Enter "x" by handwriting. Based on the input operation of the electronic pen 40, for example, “x” is displayed on the separated page 125 (see FIG. 33B).
この状態で、ユーザは、電子ペン40を第1表示部25に当接させ、図33(b)中x方向又は-y方向のいずれか一方に電子ペン40を払う動作を実行する。この電子ペン40の動作を受けて、切り離されたページ125が破棄される様子を示す動画像が表示される。この動画像の表示の後、第1表示部25には、手書き入力されていないページが編集画面として表示される。
In this state, the user brings the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25 and executes an operation of paying the electronic pen 40 in either the x direction or the −y direction in FIG. In response to the operation of the electronic pen 40, a moving image showing how the separated page 125 is discarded is displayed. After this moving image is displayed, a page that has not been handwritten is displayed on the first display unit 25 as an editing screen.
以下、手書き入力された内容を用いてメールを送信する処理、及び手書き入力された内容を削除する処理の流れを、図34のフローチャートを用いて説明する。図34のフローチャートの処理は、ユーザによる電子ペン40を用いた手書き入力操作が終了したことを契機にして実行される。以下、後述するステップS501からステップS510の処理が、手書き入力した内容を用いてメールを送信する処理となる。
Hereinafter, the flow of the process of sending an email using the contents input by handwriting and the process of deleting the contents input by handwriting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process of the flowchart in FIG. 34 is executed when the handwriting input operation using the electronic pen 40 by the user is completed. Hereinafter, processing from step S501 to step S510, which will be described later, is processing for transmitting an email using the contents input by handwriting.
ステップS501は、ページを切り離す入力操作があるか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ56は、第1表示部25のタッチパネル71からの検知信号を受けて、該検知信号が出力された表示部の種別を示す情報と、該検知信号に基づいた座標データを取得する。これら情報は、コントローラ56からCPU59へと出力される。
Step S501 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation for separating pages. The controller 56 receives the detection signal from the touch panel 71 of the first display unit 25, and acquires information indicating the type of the display unit from which the detection signal is output, and coordinate data based on the detection signal. These pieces of information are output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59.
例えば、コントローラ56から出力される座標データから、電子ペン40の入力操作が領域A2の上端部から下端部へ移動する、又は領域A2の下端部から上端部へ移動することを示すものであれば、CPU59は、ページを切り離す入力操作であると判定する。この場合、ステップS501の判定結果はYesとなり、ステップS502に進む。
For example, if the coordinate data output from the controller 56 indicates that the input operation of the electronic pen 40 moves from the upper end to the lower end of the area A2, or moves from the lower end to the upper end of the area A2. The CPU 59 determines that the operation is an input operation for separating pages. In this case, the determination result in step S501 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S502.
一方、コントローラ56から出力される座標データから、電子ペン40の入力操作が領域A2の上端部から下端部へ移動する、又は領域A2の下端部から上端部へ移動することを示すものでなければ、CPU59は、ページを切り離す入力操作でないと判定する。この場合、ステップS501の判定結果はNoとなり、図34のフローチャートが終了する。
On the other hand, if the coordinate data output from the controller 56 does not indicate that the input operation of the electronic pen 40 moves from the upper end to the lower end of the area A2 or moves from the lower end to the upper end of the area A2. The CPU 59 determines that this is not an input operation for separating pages. In this case, the determination result of step S501 is No, and the flowchart of FIG. 34 ends.
ステップS502は、ページを切り離す様子を示す動画像を表示する処理である。CPU59は、表示制御回路55に対して、ページを切り離す様子を示す動画像の表示を指示する。表示制御回路55は、ページを切り離す様子を示す動画像データに基づいた動画像を第1表示部25の表示装置70に表示する。これにより、第1表示部25において、ページを切り離す様子を示す動画像が表示される。なお、ページを切り離す様子を示す動画像データは、データメモリ61に予め記憶される。
Step S502 is a process of displaying a moving image showing a state of separating pages. The CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image that shows how the page is cut off. The display control circuit 55 displays on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 a moving image based on the moving image data indicating how the page is cut off. Thereby, the moving image which shows a mode that the page is cut off is displayed on the first display unit 25. Note that moving image data indicating a state of separating pages is stored in the data memory 61 in advance.
ステップS503は、切り離されたページを表示する処理である。CPU59は、電子ペン40の手書き入力操作にて得られる入力データを表示制御回路55に出力する。表示制御回路55は、切り離したページを示す画像データと、入力データとを用いて、切り離したページを示す画像データに基づいた画像を、第1表示部25の表示装置70に表示する。これにより、切り離されたページが表示される。なお、切り離されたページを示す画像データは、データメモリ61に予め記憶される。
Step S503 is a process for displaying the separated page. The CPU 59 outputs input data obtained by handwriting input operation of the electronic pen 40 to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 displays an image based on the image data indicating the separated page on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the image data indicating the separated page and the input data. Thereby, the separated page is displayed. Note that image data indicating the separated page is stored in the data memory 61 in advance.
ステップS504は、第2表示部においてアドレス一覧を表示する処理である。CPU59は、内蔵メモリ60に記憶されたアドレスデータを読み出し、表示制御回路55に出力する。表示制御回路55は、アドレスデータを参照し、第2表示部28の表示装置72に、アドレス一覧を表示する。
Step S504 is a process of displaying an address list on the second display unit. The CPU 59 reads the address data stored in the built-in memory 60 and outputs it to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 refers to the address data and displays the address list on the display device 72 of the second display unit 28.
ステップS505は、アドレスの選択を示す入力操作が行われたか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ56は、第2表示部28のタッチパネル73からの検知信号を受けて、該検知信号が出力された表示部の種別を示す情報と、該検知信号に基づいた座標データを取得する。これら情報は、コントローラ56からCPU59へと出力される。
Step S505 is processing for determining whether or not an input operation indicating address selection has been performed. The controller 56 receives a detection signal from the touch panel 73 of the second display unit 28, and acquires information indicating the type of the display unit from which the detection signal is output and coordinate data based on the detection signal. These pieces of information are output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59.
CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力される情報のうち、表示部の種別を示す情報から、第2表示部28のタッチパネル73の検知信号に基づいた座標データであるか否かを判定する。第2表示部28のタッチパネル73の検知信号に基づいた座標データであると判定した場合、CPU59は、ステップS505の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、S506に進む。一方、第2表示部28のタッチパネル73の検知信号に基づいた座標データでない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS505の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS511に進む。
CPU59 determines whether it is coordinate data based on the detection signal of the touch panel 73 of the 2nd display part 28 from the information which shows the classification of a display part among the information output from the controller 56. FIG. When it is determined that the coordinate data is based on the detection signal of the touch panel 73 of the second display unit 28, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S505 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when the coordinate data is not based on the detection signal of the touch panel 73 of the second display unit 28, the CPU 59 sets the determination result of step S505 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511.
ステップS506は、送信データを生成する処理である。CPU59は、入力される座標データに該当するアドレスデータを取得する。また、CPU59は、手書き入力操作時に得られる入力データと、取得したアドレスデータとを用いて、送信データを生成する。
Step S506 is a process for generating transmission data. The CPU 59 acquires address data corresponding to the input coordinate data. Further, the CPU 59 generates transmission data by using the input data obtained during the handwriting input operation and the acquired address data.
ステップS507は、ページを折りたたんで封をする様子を示す動画像を表示する処理である。CPU59は、表示制御回路55に動画像の表示を指示する。この指示の際に、CPU59は、アドレスデータを表示制御回路55に出力する。表示制御回路55は、ページを折りたたんで封をする様子を示す動画像データとアドレスデータとを用いて、該動画像データに基づいた動画像を第1表示部25の表示装置70に表示する。これにより、ページを折りたたみ封をした後、封をされたページが裏返される様子を示す動画像が第1表示部25に表示される。ページを折りたたんで封をする様子を示す動画像データは、データメモリ61に予め記憶される。
Step S507 is a process of displaying a moving image showing a state where the page is folded and sealed. The CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image. At the time of this instruction, the CPU 59 outputs address data to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 displays the moving image based on the moving image data on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the moving image data and the address data indicating that the page is folded and sealed. As a result, after the page is folded and sealed, a moving image showing how the sealed page is turned over is displayed on the first display unit 25. Moving image data showing a state where the page is folded and sealed is stored in the data memory 61 in advance.
ステップS508は、送信を示す入力動作があるか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、メールを送信する場合、ユーザは電子ペン40を第1表示部25に当接させた後、電子ペン40を図32中-y方向に払う動作を行う。この動作を行うことで、タッチパネル71から電子ペン40を検知する検知信号が逐次コントローラ56に出力される。コントローラ56は、逐次出力される検知信号に基づいた座標データをCPU59に出力する。CPU59は、入力される座標データに基づいて、電子ペン40の移動方向を特定する。電子ペン40の移動方向が図10中-y方向である場合には、CPU59は、送信を示す入力動作があると判定する。この場合、ステップS508の判定結果がYesとなり、ステップS509に進む。一方、電子ペン40の移動方向が図10中-y方向以外となる場合や、電子ペン40が移動していないと判定される場合には、CPU59は、送信を示す入力動作はないと判定する。この場合、ステップS508の判定結果がYesとなるまで繰り返し実行される。
Step S508 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation indicating transmission. As described above, when mail is transmitted, the user performs an operation of paying the electronic pen 40 in the −y direction in FIG. 32 after bringing the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25. By performing this operation, a detection signal for detecting the electronic pen 40 is sequentially output from the touch panel 71 to the controller 56. The controller 56 outputs coordinate data based on the detection signals output sequentially to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 specifies the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 based on the input coordinate data. When the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 is the -y direction in FIG. 10, the CPU 59 determines that there is an input operation indicating transmission. In this case, the determination result of step S508 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, when the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 is other than the −y direction in FIG. 10 or when it is determined that the electronic pen 40 is not moving, the CPU 59 determines that there is no input operation indicating transmission. . In this case, the process is repeatedly executed until the determination result in step S508 becomes Yes.
ステップS509は、送信データを送信する処理である。CPU59は、通信部62を介して送信データを送信する。
Step S509 is processing for transmitting transmission data. The CPU 59 transmits transmission data via the communication unit 62.
ステップS510は、メールを送信する様子を示す動画像を表示する処理である。CPU59は、表示制御回路55に動画像の表示を指示する。表示制御回路55は、メールを送信する様子を示す動画像データを用いて、該動画データに基づいた動画像を第1表示部25の表示装置70に表示する。これにより、メールを送信する様子を示す動画像が第1表示部25に表示される。この処理を行うことで、手書き入力した内容のメールが、ユーザの意図する相手の所有する携帯型電子情報端末機に送信される。
Step S510 is a process for displaying a moving image showing a state of sending an email. The CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image. The display control circuit 55 displays the moving image based on the moving image data on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the moving image data indicating a state of transmitting the mail. As a result, a moving image showing a state of transmitting the mail is displayed on the first display unit 25. By performing this process, the mail with the contents input by handwriting is transmitted to the portable electronic information terminal owned by the other party intended by the user.
上述したステップS505の判定結果がNoとなる場合、ステップS511に進む。なお、後述するステップS511からステップS514の処理が、手書き入力された内容を削除する処理となる。
If the determination result in step S505 described above is No, the process proceeds to step S511. In addition, the process of step S511 to step S514 mentioned later becomes a process which deletes the content input by handwriting.
ステップS511は、ページ上で「×」の入力操作があるか否かを判定する処理である。
Step S511 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation of “x” on the page.
電子ペン40を用いた手書き入力操作が行われると手書き入力操作に基づいた入力データが取得される。CPU59は、入力データを用いて、第1表示部25への手書き入力による文字が「×」であるか否かを判定する。手書き入力による文字が「×」であれば、CPU59は、ステップS511の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS512に進む。一方、手書き入力による文字が「×」でない場合、CPU59はステップS511の処理をNoとして、ステップS505に戻る。
When a handwriting input operation using the electronic pen 40 is performed, input data based on the handwriting input operation is acquired. The CPU 59 determines whether or not the character by handwriting input to the first display unit 25 is “x” using the input data. If the character by handwriting input is “x”, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S511. In this case, the process proceeds to step S512. On the other hand, when the character by handwriting input is not "x", CPU59 makes the process of step S511 No and returns to step S505.
ステップS512は、手書き入力された内容を削除する入力動作があるか否かを判定する処理である。手書き入力された内容を削除する場合、ユーザは電子ペン40を第1表示部25に当接させた後、図33(b)中x方向又はy方向のいずれかの方向に電子ペン40を払う動作を行う。この動作を行うことで、タッチパネル71から電子ペン40を検知する検知信号が逐次コントローラ56に出力される。コントローラ56は、逐次出力される検知信号に基づいた座標データをCPU59に出力する。CPU59は、入力される座標データに基づいて、電子ペン40の移動方向を特定する。電子ペン40の移動方向が図33(b)中x方向又はy方向のいずれかの方向である場合には、CPU59は、手書き入力された内容を削除する入力動作があると判定する。この場合、ステップS512の判定結果がYesとなり、ステップS513に進む。一方、電子ペン40の移動方向が図33(b)中x方向又はy方向のいずれかの方向以外となる場合や、電子ペン40が移動していないと判定される場合には、CPU59は、手書き入力された内容を削除する入力動作はないと判定する。この場合、ステップS512の判定結果がYesとなるまで繰り返し実行される。
Step S512 is a process for determining whether or not there is an input operation for deleting the contents input by handwriting. When deleting the content input by handwriting, after the user brings the electronic pen 40 into contact with the first display unit 25, the user pays the electronic pen 40 in either the x direction or the y direction in FIG. Perform the action. By performing this operation, a detection signal for detecting the electronic pen 40 is sequentially output from the touch panel 71 to the controller 56. The controller 56 outputs coordinate data based on the detection signals output sequentially to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 specifies the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 based on the input coordinate data. When the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 is either the x direction or the y direction in FIG. 33B, the CPU 59 determines that there is an input operation for deleting the contents input by handwriting. In this case, the determination result of step S512 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S513. On the other hand, when the moving direction of the electronic pen 40 is other than the x direction or the y direction in FIG. 33B, or when it is determined that the electronic pen 40 is not moving, the CPU 59 It is determined that there is no input operation for deleting the contents input by handwriting. In this case, the process is repeatedly executed until the determination result in step S512 becomes Yes.
ステップS513は、入力した内容を削除する処理である。電子ペン40による手書き入力操作により得られた入力データは内蔵メモリ60に記憶される。CPU59は、内蔵メモリ60に記憶された入力データを削除する。
Step S513 is a process for deleting the input content. Input data obtained by handwriting input operation with the electronic pen 40 is stored in the built-in memory 60. The CPU 59 deletes input data stored in the built-in memory 60.
ステップS514は、ページを破棄する様子を示す動画像を表示する処理である。CPU59は、表示制御回路55に動画像の表示を指示する。表示制御回路55は、ページを破棄する様子を示す動画像データを用いて、該動画像データに基づいた動画像を第1表示部25の表示装置70に表示する。これにより、ページを破棄する動画像が第1表示部25に表示される。
Step S514 is a process of displaying a moving image showing a state of discarding the page. The CPU 59 instructs the display control circuit 55 to display a moving image. The display control circuit 55 displays the moving image based on the moving image data on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 using the moving image data indicating that the page is discarded. Accordingly, a moving image for discarding the page is displayed on the first display unit 25.
一方、携帯型電子情報端末機10にてメールを受信すると、第1表示部25に封筒126が表示される。この封筒126が表示されている際に、電子ペン40により第1表示部25に入力操作が行われると、封筒126を開封する動画表示が行われ、開封されたページが表示される(図示省略)。この表示により、受信されたメールを読むことが可能となる。
On the other hand, when the portable electronic information terminal 10 receives a mail, the envelope 126 is displayed on the first display unit 25. When an input operation is performed on the first display unit 25 with the electronic pen 40 while the envelope 126 is displayed, a moving image display for opening the envelope 126 is performed, and the opened page is displayed (not shown). ). This display makes it possible to read the received mail.
このように、本実施形態の携帯型電子情報端末機10においては、手書き入力した内容を他のユーザの所有する携帯型電子情報端末機に送信する場合や、手書き入力した内容を削除する場合には、まず、手書き入力したページを電子ペン40の入力操作により切り離す動作を行う。つまり、実際の手帳においても、内容を書き込んだ頁を相手に渡す場合や、その頁を破棄する場合には、手帳から対象となる頁を破く動作を行っていることから、上述した動作を電子ペン40による入力操作でユーザに実行させることで、実際の手帳を使っているような感覚をユーザに与えることが可能となる。
As described above, in the portable electronic information terminal 10 of the present embodiment, when the content input by handwriting is transmitted to the portable electronic information terminal owned by another user, or when the content input by handwriting is deleted. First, an operation of separating a page input by handwriting by an input operation of the electronic pen 40 is performed. In other words, even in an actual notebook, when the page on which the contents are written is handed over to the other party or when the page is discarded, the operation described above is performed electronically because the target page is broken from the notebook. By causing the user to perform an input operation using the pen 40, it is possible to give the user a feeling as if using an actual notebook.
この場合、アドレス一覧から送信先のアドレスを選択した後、電子ペン40による-y方向へ払う操作を行うことで、手書き入力した内容に基づく送信データを目的の送信先に送信しているが、これに限定される必要はなく、アドレス一覧から送信先のアドレスを選択する入力操作が行われたときに、手書き入力した内容に基づく送信データを自動的に送信するようにしてもよい。
In this case, after selecting a destination address from the address list, by performing an operation of paying in the -y direction with the electronic pen 40, transmission data based on the contents input by handwriting is transmitted to the target destination. The present invention is not limited to this, and transmission data based on handwritten input content may be automatically transmitted when an input operation for selecting a destination address from an address list is performed.
また、切り離されたページに「×」を手書き入力した後、電子ペン40によるx方向又はy方向に払う動作を行うことで、手書き入力した内容を削除される場合を例に取り上げているが、これに限定される必要はなく、切り離されたページに「×」を手書き入力せずに、電子ペン40によるx方向又はy方向に払う動作を行った場合に、手書き入力した内容を削除してもよい。また、この他に、切り離されたページに「×」を手書き入力することで、手書き入力した内容を削除してもよい。
In addition, after handwriting input “x” on the separated page, the operation of paying in the x direction or the y direction with the electronic pen 40 is performed, and the case where the content input by handwriting is deleted is taken as an example. It is not necessary to be limited to this, and when the operation of paying in the x direction or the y direction with the electronic pen 40 is performed without inputting “x” by hand on a separated page, the content input by handwriting is deleted. Also good. In addition to this, the handwritten input content may be deleted by handwriting “x” on the separated page.
また、編集画面にて表示されるページに手書き入力操作を行った後、該ページに書かれた内容を他の携帯型電子情報端末機にメールとして送信する場合や、ページに書かれた内容を削除する場合について説明しているが、第1表示部25にメモ帳や付箋などを表示する場合であっても、同一の処理を行うことができる。
In addition, after performing a handwriting input operation on a page displayed on the editing screen, the content written on the page is sent as an email to another portable electronic information terminal, or the content written on the page Although the case of deleting is described, the same processing can be performed even when a notepad, a tag, or the like is displayed on the first display unit 25.
なお、上述した形態では、ページを切り離す位置が予め設定されている場合について説明しているが、電子ペン40の入力操作によりページが切り離されたと認識できれば、ページの切り離しを行える位置は予め設定する必要はない。予めページの切り離しを行える位置を設定せずにおくことで、ページの縁部にメモ書きをした内容を他のユーザに送信することが可能となる。
In the above-described embodiment, the case where the position for separating the page is set in advance has been described. However, if it can be recognized that the page is separated by the input operation of the electronic pen 40, the position where the page can be separated is set in advance. There is no need. By not setting the position where the page can be separated in advance, it is possible to transmit the contents written down at the edge of the page to other users.
なお、編集画面に表示されたページを切り離し、メールを送信する場合について説明しているが、これ限定される必要はなく、例えば編集画面に表示した画像や、WEBを表示した画面の一部の領域を切り取り、切り取った部分をメールとして送信する場合も、同様の動作が行われる。これにより、ユーザが書き込んだ文章だけでなく、画像や画像の一部を、意図する相手に送信することが可能となる。
In addition, although the case where the page displayed on the edit screen is separated and the mail is transmitted is described, it is not limited to this, for example, an image displayed on the edit screen or a part of the screen displaying the WEB The same operation is performed when the area is cut and the cut portion is transmitted as mail. Thereby, it is possible to transmit not only the text written by the user but also an image or a part of the image to an intended partner.
ここで、本実施形態においては、携帯型電子情報端末機10への入力操作の際に用いられる電子ペンとして、一般的なスタイラスペンを例に取り上げて説明している。
Here, in the present embodiment, a general stylus pen is taken as an example of the electronic pen used in the input operation to the portable electronic information terminal 10 and explained.
一般に、携帯電話機やタブレット端末などの電子情報端末機においては、タッチパネルが搭載されている。このような電子情報端末機では、ユーザの指によるタッチパネルの入力操作の他、スタイラスペンと呼ばれるペン型のポインティングデバイスを用いて入力操作を行うことができる。以下、ペン型のポインティングデバイスを電子ペンと称して説明する。
Generally, a touch panel is mounted on an electronic information terminal such as a mobile phone or a tablet terminal. In such an electronic information terminal, in addition to a touch panel input operation by a user's finger, an input operation can be performed using a pen-type pointing device called a stylus pen. Hereinafter, the pen-type pointing device will be described as an electronic pen.
ところで、電子情報端末機において描画を行う場合、描画する際に用いる色を選択するための選択用パレットを電子情報端末機に表示させることが一般的である。この選択用パレットの表示により、電子情報端末機における描画スペースが小さくなる。このため、上述した電子ペンの中には、描画する際に用いる色を電子ペン側で選択する機能を備えた電子ペンが提案されている(特開2004-103042号公報参照)。この電子ペンでは、選択された色を発色器により表示し、ユーザに描画する際に用いる色を認識させている。
By the way, when drawing is performed in an electronic information terminal, it is common to display a selection palette for selecting a color to be used for drawing on the electronic information terminal. Due to the display of the selection palette, the drawing space in the electronic information terminal is reduced. For this reason, among the above-described electronic pens, an electronic pen having a function of selecting the color used for drawing on the electronic pen side has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-103042). In this electronic pen, the selected color is displayed by a color developing device, and the user is made aware of the color used when drawing.
しかしながら、選択用パレットにて設定される色や、電子ペンにて選択できる色は予め設定された色、又はR色、G色、B色の数値を変更して設定した色が多い。このような予め設定された色を使用する描画としてイラスト画は適しているが、水彩画や油絵など、複数の色を混ぜることで生成される色を用いた描画には適していない。
However, the colors set in the selection palette and the colors that can be selected with the electronic pen are often preset colors or colors set by changing the numerical values of the R, G, and B colors. Illustration drawing is suitable for drawing using such preset colors, but is not suitable for drawing using colors generated by mixing a plurality of colors, such as watercolor paintings and oil paintings.
よって、複数の色を混ぜることで生成される色を用いながら描画を行うことができるようにしたポインティングデバイス及び入力システムを提供することを目的とする。
Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a pointing device and an input system that can perform drawing while using a color generated by mixing a plurality of colors.
この場合、電子ペンと携帯型電子情報端末機との間でのデータの送受信は、携帯型電子情報端末機の通信部と、後述する無線通信部との間で実行される。
In this case, transmission / reception of data between the electronic pen and the portable electronic information terminal is executed between the communication unit of the portable electronic information terminal and a wireless communication unit described later.
次に、携帯型電子情報端末機10への入力操作時に用いられる電子ペンについて説明する。上述したように、電子ペン130は、ペン型のポインティングデバイスであり、例えば電磁誘導方式の電子ペンが用いられる。
Next, an electronic pen used during an input operation to the portable electronic information terminal 10 will be described. As described above, the electronic pen 130 is a pen-type pointing device, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type electronic pen is used.
図35に示すように、電子ペン130は、長手方向の一端部に入力スイッチ131を、その他端部に色取得用ボタン132を備えている。入力スイッチ131は、携帯型電子情報端末機10への入力操作を行う際に、装置本体15に設けられた表示部(第1表示部25または第2表示部28)に当接、或いは近接される。このときに、電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131の内部近傍に設けられた電磁コイルにより発生する電磁波を表示部に設けられたデジタイザ(本実施形態では、タッチパネル)により検出することで、電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131の位置や、電子ペン130の傾きが検出される。
As shown in FIG. 35, the electronic pen 130 includes an input switch 131 at one end in the longitudinal direction and a color acquisition button 132 at the other end. The input switch 131 is in contact with or close to a display unit (the first display unit 25 or the second display unit 28) provided in the apparatus body 15 when performing an input operation to the portable electronic information terminal 10. The At this time, an electromagnetic wave generated by an electromagnetic coil provided in the vicinity of the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is detected by a digitizer (in this embodiment, a touch panel) provided in the display unit, whereby the electronic pen 130 is detected. The position of the input switch 131 and the tilt of the electronic pen 130 are detected.
また、電子ペン130を用いて入力操作を行う際に電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131を表示部に押し当てると入力スイッチ131に圧力がかかる。入力スイッチ131に圧力が加わると、内蔵される電磁コイルのインダクタンスが変化し、上述した電磁コイルにより発生する電磁波の強さが変化する。この電磁波の強さの変化により、入力操作される電子ペン130の筆圧を検出することができる。
Further, when an input operation is performed using the electronic pen 130, if the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is pressed against the display unit, pressure is applied to the input switch 131. When pressure is applied to the input switch 131, the inductance of the built-in electromagnetic coil changes, and the strength of the electromagnetic wave generated by the electromagnetic coil changes. Based on the change in the intensity of the electromagnetic wave, the writing pressure of the electronic pen 130 to be input can be detected.
色取得用ボタン132は、第1表示部25において描画を行う際に、第1表示部25に表示されるイラスト、画像、文字の色情報を取得する際に操作される。詳細には、この色取得用ボタン132は、第1表示部25に入力スイッチ131が当接した状態で操作され、入力スイッチ131が当接した位置に対応する第1表示部25の表示装置70の画素の色情報を取得する。以下、携帯型電子情報端末機10の第1表示部25に表示される色の情報を取得する機能をスポイト機能と称する。
The color acquisition button 132 is operated when acquiring color information of illustrations, images, and characters displayed on the first display unit 25 when drawing on the first display unit 25. Specifically, the color acquisition button 132 is operated in a state where the input switch 131 is in contact with the first display unit 25, and the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 corresponding to the position where the input switch 131 is in contact. The color information of the pixel is acquired. Hereinafter, the function of acquiring color information displayed on the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10 is referred to as a dropper function.
電子ペン130は、上述した入力スイッチ131、色取得用ボタン132の他に、モード切替ボタン133、選択/記憶ボタン134、色表示エリア135を備えている。モード切替ボタン133は、単色モードと混色モードとの間で使用するモードを切り替える。単色モードは、上述したスポイト機能により新たに取得された色情報を、描画に使用する色情報に設定するモードである。一方、混色モードは、既に色情報が取得されている状態で、スポイト機能により新たに色情報を取得したときに、既に取得された色情報に基づく色と、新たに取得された色情報に基づく色とを混ぜ合わせたときの色情報を生成し、生成された色情報を、描画に使用する色情報に設定するモードである。ここで、既に取得された色情報に基づく色と、新たに取得された色情報に基づく色との混色は、減法混色にて実行される。
The electronic pen 130 includes a mode switching button 133, a selection / storage button 134, and a color display area 135 in addition to the input switch 131 and the color acquisition button 132 described above. The mode switching button 133 switches a mode to be used between the single color mode and the mixed color mode. The single color mode is a mode in which color information newly acquired by the above-described dropper function is set as color information used for drawing. On the other hand, the color mixture mode is based on the color based on the already acquired color information and the newly acquired color information when the color information is already acquired with the dropper function when the color information is already acquired. In this mode, color information when color is mixed is generated, and the generated color information is set as color information used for drawing. Here, the color mixture based on the color information based on the already acquired color information and the color based on the newly acquired color information is executed by subtractive color mixing.
選択/記憶ボタン134は、スポイト機能を用いて取得した色情報を記憶する場合や、記憶された色情報を用いて描画を行う際に操作される。図5においては、選択/記憶ボタン134として、3個の色記憶ボタン134a,134b,134cを設けた場合を示している。つまり、図35の電子ペン130の場合には、スポイト機能を用いて取得した色情報、又は混色モードで生成された3つの色情報を最大3個記憶することができる。ここで、選択/記憶ボタン134の数は、3個に限定される必要はなく、1個又は2個でもよいし、4個以上であってもよい。
The selection / storage button 134 is operated when storing color information acquired using the dropper function or when drawing using the stored color information. FIG. 5 shows a case where three color storage buttons 134 a, 134 b, and 134 c are provided as the selection / storage button 134. That is, in the case of the electronic pen 130 of FIG. 35, it is possible to store a maximum of three pieces of color information acquired using the dropper function or three pieces of color information generated in the color mixture mode. Here, the number of selection / storage buttons 134 need not be limited to three, but may be one or two, or four or more.
詳細は後述するが、これら選択/記憶ボタン134は表示部を備えており、この表示部により色の表示が行われる。ここで、表示部に表示される色とは、スポイト機能を用いて取得した色情報のうち、各選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられた色情報に基づいた色である。これら色の表示により、それぞれの選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられて記憶された色情報をユーザが視認できる。なお、選択/記憶ボタン134が発光しない場合には、色情報が対応付けられて記憶されていないことを示す。
Although the details will be described later, these selection / storage buttons 134 include a display unit, and the display unit displays colors. Here, the color displayed on the display unit is a color based on the color information associated with each selection / storage button 134 among the color information acquired using the dropper function. By displaying these colors, the user can visually recognize the color information stored in association with each selection / storage button 134. When the selection / storage button 134 does not emit light, it indicates that the color information is not associated and stored.
色表示エリア135は、第1表示部25に描画する際に用いる色や、スポイト機能により取得された色を表示する。ここで、電子ペン130の色表示エリア135に該当する箇所は、例えば半透明又は透明の合成樹脂から構成される。
The color display area 135 displays the color used when drawing on the first display unit 25 and the color acquired by the dropper function. Here, the portion corresponding to the color display area 135 of the electronic pen 130 is made of, for example, a translucent or transparent synthetic resin.
例えば単色モードの場合にスポイト機能を使用すると、色表示エリア135の表示は、既に得られた色情報に基づいた色の表示から、新たに取得された色情報に基づいた色の表示となる。
For example, when the dropper function is used in the single color mode, the display in the color display area 135 is changed from the color display based on the already obtained color information to the color display based on the newly acquired color information.
一方、混色モードに設定されている場合にスポイト機能を使用すると、色表示エリア135の表示は、既に得られた色情報に基づいた色の表示から、表示されている色と、新たに取得された色情報に基づく色とを混ぜ合わせた色の表示に切り替わる。
On the other hand, when the dropper function is used when the color mixture mode is set, the display of the color display area 135 is newly acquired from the color display based on the already obtained color information and the displayed color. The display is switched to a color display that is a mixture of colors based on the color information.
図36は、電子ペンの電気的構成を示す図である。電子ペン130は、コントローラ141を備え、このコントローラ141により各部が制御される。このコントローラ141には、色取得用スイッチ142、モード切替スイッチ143、選択スイッチ145からのオン信号が入力され、コントローラ141は、これらスイッチからのオン信号に応じた処理を実行する。なお、図36においては、電力を供給するための電源については省略している。
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the electronic pen. The electronic pen 130 includes a controller 141, and each unit is controlled by the controller 141. The controller 141 receives ON signals from the color acquisition switch 142, the mode changeover switch 143, and the selection switch 145, and the controller 141 executes processing according to the ON signals from these switches. In FIG. 36, the power source for supplying power is omitted.
色取得用スイッチ142は、色取得用ボタン132の内部に設けられる。この色取得用スイッチ142は、色取得用ボタン132が操作されたときにオンとなり、そのオン信号がコントローラ141に出力される。これを受けて、コントローラ141は、無線通信部155を介して、携帯型電子情報端末機10から、第1表示部25の表示装置70の画素のうち、第1表示部25に当接される入力スイッチ131の位置に対応する画素の色情報を取得する。
The color acquisition switch 142 is provided inside the color acquisition button 132. The color acquisition switch 142 is turned on when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, and an ON signal is output to the controller 141. In response to this, the controller 141 is brought into contact with the first display unit 25 among the pixels of the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 from the portable electronic information terminal 10 via the wireless communication unit 155. The color information of the pixel corresponding to the position of the input switch 131 is acquired.
モード切替スイッチ143は、上述したモード切替ボタン133の内部に設けられる。このモード切替スイッチ143は、モード切替ボタン133が操作されたときにオンとなり、そのオン信号がコントローラ141に出力される。これを受けて、コントローラ141は、単色モードと混色モードとの間で切り替える。
The mode change switch 143 is provided inside the mode change button 133 described above. The mode switch 143 is turned on when the mode switch button 133 is operated, and an on signal is output to the controller 141. In response to this, the controller 141 switches between the single color mode and the mixed color mode.
上述した選択/記憶ボタン134a,134b,134cは、プッシュオン・プッシュオフ型の操作ボタンから構成される。選択/記憶ボタン134a,134b,134cの構成は同一であることから、以下、選択/記憶ボタン134aの構成のみ説明する。
The above-described selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c are constituted by push-on / push-off type operation buttons. Since the configuration of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c is the same, only the configuration of the selection / storage button 134a will be described below.
選択/記憶ボタン134aは、選択スイッチ145、ドライバ146、LED147が内蔵される。選択スイッチ145は、選択/記憶ボタン134aのプッシュオン動作によりオンとなり、プッシュオフ動作によりオフとなる。この選択/記憶ボタン134aのプッシュオン動作に基づいて、選択スイッチ145がオンとなり、オン信号がコントローラ141に出力される。コントローラ141は、選択スイッチ145からのオン信号を受けて、選択/記憶ボタン134aに対応する色情報と、該色情報に基づく各色成分のパルス幅、周期などの情報とをデータ記憶部152から読み出す。そして、コントローラ141は、各色成分のパルス幅、周期などの情報をドライバ146に出力する。ドライバ146は、入力された情報に基づいて、LED147を発光させる。ここで、LED147は、R色、B色、G色の三原色を組み合わせたフルカラーLEDが用いられる。
The selection / storage button 134a includes a selection switch 145, a driver 146, and an LED 147. The selection switch 145 is turned on by the push-on operation of the selection / storage button 134a and turned off by the push-off operation. Based on the push-on operation of the selection / storage button 134 a, the selection switch 145 is turned on and an on signal is output to the controller 141. In response to the ON signal from the selection switch 145, the controller 141 reads out color information corresponding to the selection / storage button 134a and information such as the pulse width and period of each color component based on the color information from the data storage unit 152. . Then, the controller 141 outputs information such as the pulse width and cycle of each color component to the driver 146. The driver 146 causes the LED 147 to emit light based on the input information. Here, the LED 147 is a full-color LED in which three primary colors of R, B, and G are combined.
上述した色表示エリア135の内部には、ドライバ150及びLED151が配置される。このLED151は、選択/記憶ボタン134に内蔵されたLED147と同様に、R色、B色、G色の三原色を組み合わせたフルカラーLEDから構成される。なお、図36においては、表示する色のレベル(残量、比率など)を表現できるように、3個のLED151a,151b,151cを配置した例を示している。
The driver 150 and the LED 151 are arranged inside the color display area 135 described above. Similar to the LED 147 built in the selection / storage button 134, the LED 151 is composed of a full-color LED in which three primary colors of R color, B color, and G color are combined. Note that FIG. 36 shows an example in which three LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are arranged so that the level of the displayed color (remaining amount, ratio, etc.) can be expressed.
データ記憶部152は、携帯型電子情報端末機10から得られた色情報、或いは、複数の色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせることで得られる色情報を記憶する。これら色情報は、選択/記憶ボタン134のいずれかに対応付けられて記憶される。また、データ記憶部152は、色見本データ153の他、色見本データ153に登録される色のそれぞれを発光させるための制御データ(パルス幅、周期など)154が記憶される。
The data storage unit 152 stores color information obtained from the portable electronic information terminal 10 or color information obtained by mixing colors based on a plurality of color information. The color information is stored in association with one of the selection / storage buttons 134. In addition to the color sample data 153, the data storage unit 152 stores control data (pulse width, period, etc.) 154 for causing each color registered in the color sample data 153 to emit light.
無線通信部155は、携帯型電子情報端末機10に設けられた通信部62との間でデータの送受信を行う。ここで、無線通信部155は、例えば無線LANを用いた無線通信、赤外線通信、Bluetooth(登録商標)を用いた無線通信のいずれかの無線通信により、携帯型電子情報端末機10との間でデータの送受信を行う。
The wireless communication unit 155 transmits / receives data to / from the communication unit 62 provided in the portable electronic information terminal 10. Here, the wireless communication unit 155 communicates with the portable electronic information terminal 10 by wireless communication, for example, wireless communication using a wireless LAN, infrared communication, or wireless communication using Bluetooth (registered trademark). Send and receive data.
上述したコントローラ141は、混色モードが選択されている場合に、比率設定部156、色生成部157などの機能を有している。比率設定部156は、混色モードの際に、時間的に前後して取得される色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせる際の比率を設定する。上述したように、スポイト機能を用いて色情報を取得する場合には、色取得用ボタン132を操作する必要がある。比率設定部156は、色取得用ボタン132が操作された時間や、色取得用ボタン132が操作された回数及び色取得用ボタン132が操作されたときの圧力などに基づいて、取得される複数の色情報のそれぞれに対する色の容量を算出する。そして、比率設定部156は、複数の色情報のそれぞれに対して求められた色の容量から、複数の色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせるときの比率を設定する。つまり、比率設定部156は、色取得用スイッチ142がオンされる回数をカウントするカウンタや、色取得用スイッチ142がオンされ続けたときの継続時間を測定するタイマを備えている。なお、色取得用ボタン132が操作されたときの圧力は、不図示の圧力センサからの出力を用いればよい。
The controller 141 described above has functions such as a ratio setting unit 156 and a color generation unit 157 when the color mixture mode is selected. The ratio setting unit 156 sets a ratio for mixing colors based on color information acquired before and after the time in the color mixture mode. As described above, when the color information is acquired using the dropper function, it is necessary to operate the color acquisition button 132. The ratio setting unit 156 is acquired based on the time when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the number of times the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, and the like. The color capacity for each color information is calculated. Then, the ratio setting unit 156 sets a ratio when colors based on the plurality of pieces of color information are mixed from the color capacity obtained for each of the plurality of pieces of color information. In other words, the ratio setting unit 156 includes a counter that counts the number of times the color acquisition switch 142 is turned on, and a timer that measures a duration when the color acquisition switch 142 is kept on. The pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated may be output from a pressure sensor (not shown).
色生成部157は、比率設定部156により求めた比率を用いて、既に取得された色情報に基づく色と、新たに取得された色情報に基づく色とを混ぜ合わせたときの色情報を生成する。コントローラ141は生成された色情報に基づいて、対応する選択/記憶ボタン134のLED147や色表示エリア135のLED151を発光制御する。なお、混色された色情報を記憶する場合には、コントローラ141は、生成された色情報と、オンとなる選択/記憶ボタン134とを対応付けてデータ記憶部152に書き込む。
The color generation unit 157 generates color information when the color based on the already acquired color information and the color based on the newly acquired color information are mixed using the ratio obtained by the ratio setting unit 156 To do. Based on the generated color information, the controller 141 controls the light emission of the LED 147 of the corresponding selection / storage button 134 and the LED 151 of the color display area 135. When storing the mixed color information, the controller 141 writes the generated color information and the selection / storage button 134 that is turned on in association with each other into the data storage unit 152.
次に、描画を行うときの、電子ペン130における処理の流れを、図37のフローチャートを用いて説明する。
Next, the flow of processing in the electronic pen 130 when drawing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
ステップS601は、選択スイッチのいずれかがオンとなるか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ141は、選択/記憶ボタン134毎に設けられた選択スイッチ145のいずれかからオン信号の入力があれば、ステップS601の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS602に進む。一方、選択/記憶ボタン134毎に設けられた選択スイッチ145のいずれかからオン信号の入力がない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS601の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS604に進む。
Step S601 is a process of determining whether any of the selection switches is turned on. If an ON signal is input from any of the selection switches 145 provided for each selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S601 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S602. On the other hand, if there is no ON signal input from any of the selection switches 145 provided for each selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S601 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S604.
ステップS602は、色情報があるか否かを判定する処理である。ステップS601の判定結果がYesとなる場合に、ステップS602が実行される。コントローラ141は、オン信号を出力する選択スイッチ145が、選択/記憶ボタン134a、134b、134cのいずれかの選択/記憶ボタン134に設けられた選択スイッチ145であるかを特定する。そして、コントローラ141は、データ記憶部152を参照して、特定された選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられた色情報が記憶されているか否かを判定する。特定された選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられた色情報がある場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS602の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS603に進む。一方、特定された選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられた色情報がない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS602の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS604に進む。
Step S602 is processing for determining whether or not there is color information. If the determination result in step S601 is Yes, step S602 is executed. The controller 141 determines whether the selection switch 145 that outputs the ON signal is the selection switch 145 provided in any of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c. Then, the controller 141 refers to the data storage unit 152 and determines whether or not the color information associated with the specified selection / storage button 134 is stored. If there is color information associated with the selected selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S602 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S603. On the other hand, if there is no color information associated with the specified selection / storage button 134, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S602 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S604.
ステップS603は、色を表示する処理である。ステップS602において、特定された選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられた色情報がある場合に、ステップS603の処理が実行される。コントローラ141は、データ記憶部152から、選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられた色情報を読み出す。また、コントローラ141は、データ記憶部152に記憶された色見本テーブル153と、制御データ154とを読み出し、色情報に基づいた制御データをドライバ150に出力する。これを受けて、ドライバ150は、LED151a,151b,151cをそれぞれ発光制御する。これにより、選択/記憶ボタン134a,134b,134cのうち、操作された選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けて記憶された色が色表示エリア135に表示される。
Step S603 is a process for displaying a color. In step S602, if there is color information associated with the selected selection / storage button 134, the process of step S603 is executed. The controller 141 reads out color information associated with the selection / storage button 134 from the data storage unit 152. In addition, the controller 141 reads the color sample table 153 and the control data 154 stored in the data storage unit 152 and outputs control data based on the color information to the driver 150. In response, the driver 150 controls the light emission of the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c. As a result, among the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c, the color stored in association with the operated selection / storage button 134 is displayed in the color display area 135.
なお、ステップS602において、特定された選択/記憶ボタン134に対応付けられた色情報がない場合には、上述したステップS603の処理が実行されないので、LED151a,151b,151cは発光されず、色表示エリア135にて色の表示は行われない。
In step S602, if there is no color information associated with the specified selection / storing button 134, the above-described processing in step S603 is not executed, so that the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are not emitted, and color display is performed. Color display is not performed in area 135.
ステップS604は、色情報の要求信号を受信したか否かを判定する処理である。例えば電子ペン130を用いて携帯型電子情報端末機10の第1表示部25へ入力操作を行う場合には、電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131を第1表示部25に当接させる。上述したように、第1表示部25はタッチパネル71を備えており、入力スイッチ131が当接されたことを検知する。入力スイッチ131が当接されたことを検知することで、携帯型電子情報端末機10から電子ペン130に向けて、色情報の要求信号が送信される。コントローラ141は、無線通信部155を介して、色情報の要求信号を受信したか否かを判定する。色情報の要求信号を受信した場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS604の判定結果をYesとし、ステップS605に進む。一方、色情報の要求信号を受信していない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS604の判定結果をNoとし、ステップS607に進む。
Step S604 is processing for determining whether or not a color information request signal has been received. For example, when an input operation is performed on the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10 using the electronic pen 130, the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is brought into contact with the first display unit 25. As described above, the first display unit 25 includes the touch panel 71 and detects that the input switch 131 is in contact. By detecting that the input switch 131 is in contact, a request signal for color information is transmitted from the portable electronic information terminal 10 to the electronic pen 130. The controller 141 determines whether or not a color information request signal has been received via the wireless communication unit 155. When the color information request signal is received, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S604 to Yes, and proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, if the color information request signal has not been received, the controller 141 determines No in step S604 and proceeds to step S607.
ステップS605は、色情報があるか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ141は、色表示エリア135において色の表示を実行しているか否かを判定する。例えば色表示エリア135において色の表示を行っている場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS605の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS606に進む。一方、色表示エリア135において色の表示を行っていない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS605の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS607に進む。
Step S605 is processing for determining whether or not there is color information. The controller 141 determines whether or not color display is being performed in the color display area 135. For example, when displaying a color in the color display area 135, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S605 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S606. On the other hand, if no color is displayed in the color display area 135, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S605 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S607.
ステップS606は、色情報を送信する処理である。コントローラ141は、データ記憶部152から色表示エリア135にて表示した色に基づく色情報を読み出す。そして、コントローラ141は、無線通信部155を介して携帯型電子情報端末機10に向けて色情報を送信する。これにより、電子ペン130を用いて、携帯型電子情報端末機10の第1表示部25に描画したときに、電子ペン130にて設定される色を用いた直線や曲線の描画を行うことが可能になる。
Step S606 is a process of transmitting color information. The controller 141 reads color information based on the color displayed in the color display area 135 from the data storage unit 152. The controller 141 transmits the color information to the portable electronic information terminal 10 through the wireless communication unit 155. Accordingly, when the electronic pen 130 is used to draw on the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10, a straight line or a curve using the color set by the electronic pen 130 can be drawn. It becomes possible.
ステップS607は、色取得用スイッチがオンとなるか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、電子ペン130においては、スポイト機能により第1表示面25に表示される色の情報を取得することが可能となる。ユーザにより色取得用ボタン132が操作されると、色取得用ボタン132の内部に設けられた色取得用スイッチ142がオンとなり、そのオン信号がコントローラ141に出力される。コントローラ141は、この色取得用スイッチ142からのオン信号が入力されるか否かを判定する。例えば色取得用スイッチ142からのオン信号が入力される場合、コントローラ141は、ステップS607の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS608に進む。一方、色取得用スイッチ142からのオン信号が入力されない場合、コントローラ141は、ステップS607の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS617に進む。
Step S607 is processing for determining whether or not the color acquisition switch is turned on. As described above, in the electronic pen 130, the color information displayed on the first display surface 25 can be acquired by the dropper function. When the color acquisition button 132 is operated by the user, the color acquisition switch 142 provided inside the color acquisition button 132 is turned on, and the ON signal is output to the controller 141. The controller 141 determines whether or not the ON signal from the color acquisition switch 142 is input. For example, when an ON signal is input from the color acquisition switch 142, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S607 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S608. On the other hand, when the ON signal from the color acquisition switch 142 is not input, the controller 141 determines No in step S607. In this case, the process proceeds to step S617.
ステップS608は、色情報の要求信号を送信する処理である。コントローラ141は、無線通信部155を介して携帯型電子情報端末機10に色情報の要求信号を出力する。
Step S608 is processing for transmitting a request signal for color information. The controller 141 outputs a color information request signal to the portable electronic information terminal 10 via the wireless communication unit 155.
ステップS609は、色情報を受信したか否かを判定する処理である。例えば電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131が携帯型電子情報端末機10の第1表示部25に当接された状態で、上述した色取得用スイッチ142がオンとなると、電子ペン130から携帯型電子情報端末機10に向けて色情報の要求信号が出力される。色情報の要求信号を受けて、携帯型電子情報端末機10は、電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131が当接される座標データに対応する画素の色情報を取得する。そして、取得した色情報を電子ペン130に送信する。
Step S609 is processing for determining whether or not color information is received. For example, when the above-described color acquisition switch 142 is turned on while the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is in contact with the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10, the portable electronic information is transferred from the electronic pen 130. A color information request signal is output to the terminal 10. In response to the color information request signal, the portable electronic information terminal 10 acquires the color information of the pixel corresponding to the coordinate data with which the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is abutted. Then, the acquired color information is transmitted to the electronic pen 130.
携帯型電子情報端末機10から送信された色情報は、電子ペン130の無線通信部155にて受信される。この場合、コントローラ141は、ステップS609の判定をYesとし、ステップS610に進む。一方、携帯型電子情報端末機10から送信された色情報が電子ペン130の無線通信部155にて受信していない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS609の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS609の判定結果がYesとなるまで繰り返しステップS609の判定処理を実行する。
The color information transmitted from the portable electronic information terminal 10 is received by the wireless communication unit 155 of the electronic pen 130. In this case, the controller 141 determines Yes in step S609, and proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, when the color information transmitted from the portable electronic information terminal 10 is not received by the wireless communication unit 155 of the electronic pen 130, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S609 to No. In this case, the determination process of step S609 is repeatedly performed until the determination result of step S609 becomes Yes.
ステップS610は、単色モードであるか否かを判定する処理である。この電子ペン130は、モード切替ボタン133の操作により、単色モード及び混色モードの間で切り替えることが可能である。コントローラ141は、データ記憶部152に記憶された電子ペン130のモード情報を読み出し、単色モードか否かを判定する。モード情報が単色モードを示す情報であれば、コントローラ141は、ステップS610の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS611に進む。一方、モード情報が混色モードを示す情報であれば、コントローラ141は、ステップS610の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS614に進む。
Step S610 is processing for determining whether or not the mode is the single color mode. The electronic pen 130 can be switched between the single color mode and the mixed color mode by operating the mode switching button 133. The controller 141 reads out the mode information of the electronic pen 130 stored in the data storage unit 152 and determines whether or not the mode is the single color mode. If the mode information is information indicating a single color mode, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S610 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S611. On the other hand, if the mode information is information indicating the color mixture mode, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S610 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S614.
電子ペン130が単色モードに設定されている場合には、ステップS610の判定結果がYesとなり、ステップS611に進む。
If the electronic pen 130 is set to the single color mode, the determination result of step S610 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S611.
ステップS611は、色表示エリアにおいて色が表示されているか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ141は、LED151を発光させているか否かによって、ステップS611の判定処理を実行する。つまり、LED151を発光させている場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS611の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS612に進む。一方、LED151を発光させていない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS611の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS613に進む。
Step S611 is processing for determining whether or not a color is displayed in the color display area. The controller 141 executes the determination process in step S611 depending on whether or not the LED 151 is emitting light. That is, when the LED 151 is caused to emit light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S611 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S612. On the other hand, if the LED 151 is not emitting light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S611 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S613.
ステップS612は、色表示を変更する処理である。単色モードに設定されているときにスポイト機能を用いた場合、コントローラ141は、色表示エリア135にて表示される色を、先に取得されている色情報に基づく色から、新たに取得した色情報に基づく色に切り替える処理を実行する。コントローラ141は、新たに取得した色情報に基づいた制御データをデータ記憶部152から読み出す。そして、新たに取得した色情報に基づいた制御データをドライバ150に出力する。これを受けて、ドライバ150は、新たに入力された制御データを用いてLED151a,151b、151cを発光制御する。これにより、色表示エリア135にて表示される色が変更される。
Step S612 is a process for changing the color display. When the dropper function is used when the monochrome mode is set, the controller 141 changes the color displayed in the color display area 135 from the color based on the previously acquired color information. A process of switching to a color based on information is executed. The controller 141 reads control data based on the newly acquired color information from the data storage unit 152. Then, control data based on the newly acquired color information is output to the driver 150. In response to this, the driver 150 controls the light emission of the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c using the newly input control data. As a result, the color displayed in the color display area 135 is changed.
ステップS613は、色を表示する処理である。このステップS613は、色表示エリア135にて色表示が実行されていない場合に行われる処理である。コントローラ141は、取得した色情報に対応する制御データ154をデータ記憶部152から読み出す。そして、取得した色情報に基づいた制御データ154をドライバ150に出力する。これを受けて、ドライバ150は、入力された制御データ154を用いてLED151a,151b、151cを発光制御する。これにより、色表示エリア135において、取得された色の表示が行われる。
Step S613 is a process for displaying a color. Step S613 is processing performed when color display is not executed in the color display area 135. The controller 141 reads out control data 154 corresponding to the acquired color information from the data storage unit 152. Then, the control data 154 based on the acquired color information is output to the driver 150. In response to this, the driver 150 controls the light emission of the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c using the input control data 154. As a result, the acquired color is displayed in the color display area 135.
ステップS610においてNoとなる場合、つまり、電子ペン130が混色モードに設定されている場合には、ステップS614に進む。
If No in step S610, that is, if the electronic pen 130 is set to the color mixture mode, the process proceeds to step S614.
ステップS614は、色表示エリアにおいて色が表示されているか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ141は、LED151a,151b,151cを発光させているか否かによって、ステップS614の判定処理を実行する。つまり、LED151a,151b,151cを発光させている場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS614の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS615に進む。一方、LED151a,151b,151cを発光させていない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS614の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS616に進む。
Step S614 is processing for determining whether or not a color is displayed in the color display area. The controller 141 executes the determination process in step S614 depending on whether the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are emitting light. That is, when the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are caused to emit light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S614 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S615. On the other hand, if the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c are not emitting light, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S614 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S616.
ステップS615は、色情報を生成する処理である。上述したように、電子ペン130は混色モードに設定されている。コントローラ141は、まず、先に得られた色情報に基づく色と、新たに取得された色情報に基づく色とを混ぜ合わせる際の比率を求める。詳細には、コントローラ141は、時間的に前後して取得される色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせる際の比率を設定する。コントローラ141は、色取得用ボタン132が操作された時間や、色取得用ボタン132が操作された回数及び色取得用ボタン132が操作されたときの圧力などに基づいて、取得される複数の色情報のそれぞれに対する色の容量を算出する。そして、コントローラ141内の比率設定部156は、複数の色情報のそれぞれに対して求められた色の容量から、複数の色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせるときの比率を設定する。コントローラ141内の色生成部157は、求めた比率を用いて既に得られた色情報に基づく色と、新たに取得された色情報に基づく色とを混ぜ合わせた混色の色情報を生成する。
Step S615 is processing for generating color information. As described above, the electronic pen 130 is set to the color mixture mode. First, the controller 141 obtains a ratio when the color based on the previously obtained color information is mixed with the color based on the newly acquired color information. Specifically, the controller 141 sets a ratio for mixing colors based on color information acquired before and after in time. The controller 141 acquires a plurality of colors acquired based on the time when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the number of times the color acquisition button 132 is operated, the pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated, and the like. Calculate the color capacity for each piece of information. Then, the ratio setting unit 156 in the controller 141 sets a ratio when colors based on the plurality of pieces of color information are mixed from the color capacities obtained for each of the plurality of pieces of color information. The color generation unit 157 in the controller 141 generates color information of mixed colors obtained by mixing the color based on the color information already obtained using the obtained ratio and the color based on the newly acquired color information.
ステップS616は、色を表示する処理である。例えばステップS115の処理(色情報を生成する処理)が実行されている場合、コントローラ141は、ステップS615にて生成された色情報に対応する制御データ154をデータ記憶部152から読み出し、ドライバ150に出力する。また、ステップS614の判定結果がNoとなる場合には、コントローラ141は、新たに取得された色情報に対応付けられた制御データ154をデータ記憶部152から読み出し、ドライバ150に出力する。ドライバ150は、入力される制御データに基づいて、LED151a,151b,151cを表示する。これにより、色表示エリア135において色表示が実行される。
Step S616 is a process for displaying a color. For example, when the process of step S115 (process for generating color information) is being performed, the controller 141 reads the control data 154 corresponding to the color information generated in step S615 from the data storage unit 152, and sends it to the driver 150. Output. If the determination result in step S614 is No, the controller 141 reads the control data 154 associated with the newly acquired color information from the data storage unit 152 and outputs the control data 154 to the driver 150. The driver 150 displays the LEDs 151a, 151b, and 151c based on the input control data. As a result, color display is executed in the color display area 135.
ステップS617は、選択スイッチのいずれかがオンであるか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、選択/記憶ボタン134をプッシュオン動作すると、選択スイッチ145がオンとなり、オン信号がコントローラ141に出力される。コントローラ141は、選択/記憶ボタン134a,134b,134cの選択スイッチ145のいずれかのオン信号が出力されているか否かを判定する。選択/記憶ボタン134a,134b,134cの選択スイッチ145のいずれかからオン信号が出力されている場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS617の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS618に進む。一方、選択/記憶ボタン134a,134b,134cの選択スイッチ145のいずれかからもオン信号が出力されていない場合には、コントローラ141は、ステップS618の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、図37に示すフローチャートの処理の流れが終了する。つまり、ステップS617における判定結果でNoとなる場合には、色表示エリア135にて表示された色の情報は、記憶されることはない。
Step S617 is processing for determining whether any of the selection switches is on. As described above, when the selection / storage button 134 is pushed on, the selection switch 145 is turned on and an on signal is output to the controller 141. The controller 141 determines whether an ON signal is output from any of the selection switches 145 of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c. If an ON signal is output from any of the selection switches 145 of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c, the controller 141 sets the determination result in step S617 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S618. On the other hand, when the ON signal is not output from any of the selection switches 145 of the selection / storage buttons 134a, 134b, and 134c, the controller 141 sets the determination result of step S618 to No. In this case, the processing flow of the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, if the determination result in step S617 is No, the color information displayed in the color display area 135 is not stored.
ステップS618は、色情報を記憶する処理である。コントローラ141は、オン信号が出力される選択スイッチ145が内蔵される選択/記憶ボタン134と色情報とを対応付けて、データ記憶部152に記憶する。
Step S618 is processing for storing color information. The controller 141 stores the selection / storage button 134 in which the selection switch 145 for outputting the ON signal is built in and the color information in association with each other in the data storage unit 152.
ステップS619は、色表示を変更する処理である。コントローラ141は、データ記憶部152に記憶される制御データ154を参照して、記憶する色情報が対応付けられた選択/記憶ボタン134に内蔵されるLED147を発光させる。これにより、プッシュオンされた選択/記憶ボタン134における色表示が変更される。
Step S619 is a process of changing the color display. The controller 141 refers to the control data 154 stored in the data storage unit 152 and causes the LED 147 incorporated in the selection / storage button 134 associated with the color information to be stored to emit light. As a result, the color display of the push-on selection / storage button 134 is changed.
このように、単色モードにおいては、先に色情報を取得している状態で、スポイト機能を用いた場合、先に得られた色情報に基づく色の表示から、新たに取得された色情報に基づいた色の表示に切り替わる。また、色情報を取得していない状態でスポイト機能を用いた場合には、新たに取得された色情報に基づいた色の表示が行われる。
As described above, in the single color mode, when the dropper function is used in the state where the color information has been acquired first, the color display based on the previously obtained color information is changed to the newly acquired color information. Switch to the color display based on. Further, when the dropper function is used in a state where the color information is not acquired, a color is displayed based on the newly acquired color information.
また、混色モードにおいては、先に色情報を取得している場合には、その色情報に基づく色と、スポイト機能を用いて新たに取得した色情報に基づく色とを混ぜ合わせることで、新たな色情報を生成し、生成した色情報に基づいた色が色表示エリア135に表示される。
In the color mixture mode, if the color information has been acquired first, the color based on the color information and the color based on the color information newly acquired using the dropper function are mixed to newly Color information is generated, and a color based on the generated color information is displayed in the color display area 135.
このように、第1表示部25に表示されるイラストや文字などに使用される色の情報を電子ペン130により取得し、取得した色をそのまま、或いは、取得した複数の色を混ぜ合わせた状態で使用することができる。つまり、使用する色を選択するためにカラーパレットを表示部にて表示する必要がなくなるので、描画を行うスペースを確保することが可能となる。また、複数の色の情報を順次取得した場合には、これら色の情報に基づく色を混色したときの色の情報を生成することになるので、実際に絵の具などを混ぜながら描画する感覚を得ることが可能となる。
In this way, information on the colors used for the illustrations and characters displayed on the first display unit 25 is acquired by the electronic pen 130, and the acquired colors are used as they are or a plurality of acquired colors are mixed. Can be used in That is, since it is not necessary to display a color palette on the display unit in order to select a color to be used, a space for drawing can be secured. In addition, when information on a plurality of colors is acquired sequentially, color information when colors based on these color information are mixed is generated, so that a feeling of drawing while actually mixing paints is obtained. It becomes possible.
以下、携帯型電子情報端末機10の第1表示部25に表示される編集画面において、電子ペン130を用いた描画が行われるときの処理の流れを図38のフローチャートを用いて説明する。なお、図38のフローチャートにおいては、本実施形態の電子ペン130が、携帯型電子情報端末機10において設定されている場合について説明している。
Hereinafter, the flow of processing when drawing using the electronic pen 130 is performed on the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of FIG. 38, the case where the electronic pen 130 of this embodiment is set in the portable electronic information terminal 10 is described.
ステップS701は、タッチパネルによる検知があるか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、第1表示部25はタッチパネル71を備えており、電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131がタッチパネル71に当接されると、タッチパネル71からコントローラ56に向けて検知信号が出力される。コントローラ56は、タッチパネル71の検知信号に基づく座標データをCPU59に出力する。CPU59は、コントローラ56からの座標データの出力の有無によって、タッチパネル71による検知があるか否かを判定する。例えばコントローラ56からの座標信号の出力があれば、CPU59は、タッチパネル71による検知があると判定し、ステップS702に進む。一方、例えばコントローラ56からの座標データの出力がない場合には、CPU59は、タッチパネル71による検知がないと判定し、ステップS710に進む。
Step S701 is processing for determining whether or not there is detection by the touch panel. As described above, the first display unit 25 includes the touch panel 71, and when the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 is brought into contact with the touch panel 71, a detection signal is output from the touch panel 71 toward the controller 56. The controller 56 outputs coordinate data based on the detection signal of the touch panel 71 to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 determines whether or not there is a detection by the touch panel 71 based on whether or not coordinate data is output from the controller 56. For example, if there is a coordinate signal output from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines that there is detection by the touch panel 71, and the process proceeds to step S702. On the other hand, for example, when there is no output of coordinate data from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines that there is no detection by the touch panel 71, and proceeds to step S710.
ステップS702は、色情報の要求信号を送信する処理である。CPU59は、通信部62を介して、色情報の要求信号を送信する。
Step S702 is a process of transmitting a color information request signal. The CPU 59 transmits a color information request signal via the communication unit 62.
ステップS703は、色情報を受信したか否かを判定する処理である。通信部62により電子ペン130から送信された色情報を受信していれば、CPU59はステップS703の判定結果をYesとする。一方、通信部62により電子ペン130から送信された色情報を受信していない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS703の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS703の判定結果がYesとなるまで、このステップS203の判定処理が繰り返し実行される。
Step S703 is processing for determining whether or not color information is received. If the color information transmitted from the electronic pen 130 is received by the communication unit 62, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S703. On the other hand, when the color information transmitted from the electronic pen 130 is not received by the communication unit 62, the CPU 59 sets the determination result of step S703 to No. In this case, the determination process of step S203 is repeatedly executed until the determination result of step S703 becomes Yes.
ステップS704は、描画時の色情報を設定する処理である。CPU59は、編集画面に対して実行される描画(イラスト、文字)を行う際の色情報として、電子ペン130から受信した色情報を設定する。
Step S704 is processing for setting color information at the time of drawing. The CPU 59 sets the color information received from the electronic pen 130 as color information when drawing (illustrations, characters) executed on the editing screen.
ステップS705は、タッチパネルにより検知される位置が変化しているか否かを判定する処理である。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力される座標データを参照して、タッチパネル71により検知される位置が変化しているか否かを判定する。タッチパネル71により検知される位置が変化している場合には、CPU59は、このステップS705の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、S706に進む。一方、タッチパネル71により検知される位置が変化していない場合には、CPU59は、このステップS705の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS708に進む。
Step S705 is processing for determining whether or not the position detected by the touch panel has changed. The CPU 59 refers to the coordinate data output from the controller 56 and determines whether or not the position detected by the touch panel 71 has changed. If the position detected by the touch panel 71 has changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S705 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the position detected by the touch panel 71 has not changed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S705 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S708.
ステップS706は、描画処理である。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力される座標データと、設定された色情報とを表示制御回路55に出力する。表示制御回路55は、コントローラ56から出力される座標信号から移動軌跡を求め、求めた移動軌跡を編集画面の元になる編集画像に重畳させて表示する。この際、求めた移動軌跡は、設定された色情報に基づく色で表示する。つまり、このステップS706の処理を行うことで、電子ペン130の移動に基づく移動軌跡が、電子ペン130にて設定される色にて表示されていく。これにより、文字やイラストなどが描画される。
Step S706 is a drawing process. The CPU 59 outputs the coordinate data output from the controller 56 and the set color information to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 obtains a movement locus from the coordinate signal output from the controller 56, and displays the obtained movement locus so as to be superimposed on the editing image that is the basis of the editing screen. At this time, the obtained movement locus is displayed in a color based on the set color information. That is, by performing the process of step S706, the movement locus based on the movement of the electronic pen 130 is displayed in the color set by the electronic pen 130. Thereby, a character, an illustration, etc. are drawn.
ステップS707は、タッチパネルによる検知がないかを判定する処理である。タッチパネル71への電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131の当接が解除されると、タッチパネル71による検知が解除される。つまり、コントローラ56からCPU59へと座標データの出力が停止される。CPU59は、座標データの出力が停止されたか否かにより、タッチパネル71による検知がないかを判定する。例えば座標データの出力が停止された場合には、コントローラ56は、タッチパネル71による検知がないと判定する。この場合、ステップS707の判定結果がYesとなり、ステップS710に進む。
Step S707 is processing for determining whether there is detection by the touch panel. When the contact of the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 with the touch panel 71 is released, the detection by the touch panel 71 is released. That is, the output of coordinate data from the controller 56 to the CPU 59 is stopped. The CPU 59 determines whether there is no detection by the touch panel 71 based on whether or not the output of the coordinate data is stopped. For example, when the output of the coordinate data is stopped, the controller 56 determines that there is no detection by the touch panel 71. In this case, the determination result of step S707 is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S710.
一方、座標データの出力が停止されていない場合には、コントローラ56は、タッチパネル71により検知されていると判定する。この場合、ステップS707の判定結果がNoとなり、ステップS705に進む。
On the other hand, if the output of the coordinate data is not stopped, the controller 56 determines that the touch panel 71 has detected the coordinate data. In this case, the determination result of step S707 is No, and the process proceeds to step S705.
ステップS705の判定結果がNoとなる場合、ステップS708に進む。
If the determination result of step S705 is No, the process proceeds to step S708.
ステップS708は、色情報の要求信号を受信したか否かを判定する処理である。電子ペン130による色取得用ボタン132が操作されると、色取得用スイッチ142がオンとなり、電子ペン130から色情報の要求信号が送信される。CPU59は、色情報の要求信号が通信部62にて受信されたか否かを判定する。通信部62により色情報の要求信号が受信されていれば、CPU59は、ステップS708の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS709に進む。
Step S708 is a process for determining whether or not a color information request signal has been received. When the color acquisition button 132 by the electronic pen 130 is operated, the color acquisition switch 142 is turned on, and a request signal for color information is transmitted from the electronic pen 130. The CPU 59 determines whether or not the color information request signal is received by the communication unit 62. If the color information request signal is received by the communication unit 62, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S708 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S709.
一方、通信部62により色情報の要求信号が受信されていない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS708の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS710に進む。
On the other hand, if the color information request signal is not received by the communication unit 62, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S708 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S710.
ステップS709は、色情報を送信する処理である。CPU59は、表示制御回路55に対して、コントローラ56から出力される座標データを出力する。表示制御回路55は、座標データに対応する第1表示部25の表示装置70の画素の色情報を取得し、CPU59に出力する。CPU59は、取得した色情報を通信部62に出力する。これを受けて、通信部62は、色情報を電子ペン130に向けて送信する。
Step S709 is a process of transmitting color information. The CPU 59 outputs the coordinate data output from the controller 56 to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 acquires the color information of the pixel of the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 corresponding to the coordinate data, and outputs it to the CPU 59. The CPU 59 outputs the acquired color information to the communication unit 62. In response to this, the communication unit 62 transmits the color information to the electronic pen 130.
ステップS710は、編集画面を終了するか否かを判定する処理である。例えば電子ペン130の入力操作が、描画ではなく、画面の切り替えを示すものであれば、CPU59は、ステップS710の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、図38のフローチャートの流れが終了する。一方、例えば電子ペン130の入力操作が、描画を行うものであれば、CPU59は、ステップS710の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS701に戻る。
Step S710 is processing for determining whether or not to end the editing screen. For example, if the input operation of the electronic pen 130 indicates screen switching instead of drawing, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S710. In this case, the flow of the flowchart of FIG. 38 ends. On the other hand, for example, if the input operation of the electronic pen 130 performs drawing, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S710 to No. In this case, the process returns to step S701.
このように、携帯型電子情報端末機10において電子ペン130を用いた描画を行う場合には、電子ペン130から色情報を取得し、描画に基づく処理を実行する。また、電子ペン130によって色を取得する場合には、第1表示部25に表示される編集画面上の画素の色情報を電子ペン130に向けて送信する。この送信により、電子ペン130側で描画する際に用いる色が設定される。つまり、携帯型電子情報端末機10においては、カラーパレットを表示する必要がなくなるので、編集画面においてユーザが描画するスペースを広くすることが可能となる。
Thus, when drawing using the electronic pen 130 in the portable electronic information terminal 10, color information is acquired from the electronic pen 130, and processing based on the drawing is executed. Further, when the color is acquired by the electronic pen 130, the color information of the pixel on the editing screen displayed on the first display unit 25 is transmitted to the electronic pen 130. By this transmission, the color used when drawing on the electronic pen 130 side is set. That is, in the portable electronic information terminal 10, there is no need to display a color palette, so that it is possible to widen the space for the user to draw on the editing screen.
本実施形態では、カラーパレットの表示の有無については記載していないが、カラーパレットを表示させてもよいし、表示させなくてもよい。また、カラーパレットの表示/非表示を切り替えるようにしてもよい。この場合、例えば第1表示部25の外周縁部にカラーパレット用のタブを表示する。そして、電子ペン130によりタブを引き出す操作を行うことでカラーパレットを表示させ、電子ペン130によりタブを押し込む操作を行うことでカラーパレットを非表示とすればよい。ここで、カラーパレットの表示/非表示を切り替える動作は上記に限定されるものではなく、カラーパレットの表示/非表示を切り替えるボタンを設けることも可能である。このように、カラーパレットの表示/非表示を切り替えることで、第1表示部25に表示されるイラスト、文字などに使用される色において、ユーザが意図する色がない場合に対応することが可能となる。
In the present embodiment, whether or not the color palette is displayed is not described, but the color palette may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, display / non-display of the color palette may be switched. In this case, for example, a tab for a color palette is displayed on the outer peripheral edge of the first display unit 25. Then, the color palette may be displayed by performing an operation of pulling out the tab with the electronic pen 130, and the color palette may be hidden by performing an operation of pushing the tab with the electronic pen 130. Here, the operation for switching the display / non-display of the color palette is not limited to the above, and a button for switching the display / non-display of the color palette may be provided. In this way, by switching between display and non-display of the color palette, it is possible to cope with a case where there is no color intended by the user among colors used for illustrations, characters, etc. displayed on the first display unit 25. It becomes.
本実施形態では、透明又は半透明の合成樹脂からなる色表示エリア135の内部に複数のLED151を配置した構成としているが、これに限定される必要はなく、液晶表示装置や有機ELディスプレイなどの表示装置を用いて色の表示を行うことも可能である。
In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 151 are arranged inside a color display area 135 made of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display, etc. It is also possible to display colors using a display device.
このような表示装置を用いることで、スポイト機能を用いて取得した色情報に基づく色と、既に取得されている色情報に基づく色とが混ぜ合わされる様子を表示することができる。この場合、既に取得された色に対して、新たに取得される色が混ぜ合わされていく様子を示す動画表示用のプログラムやデータをデータ記憶部に記憶させておけばよい。
By using such a display device, it is possible to display a state in which the color based on the color information acquired using the dropper function and the color based on the already acquired color information are mixed. In this case, a program and data for displaying a moving image showing how the newly acquired color is mixed with the already acquired color may be stored in the data storage unit.
また、液晶表示装置や有機ELディスプレイなどの表示装置を設けることで、色取得用ボタン132を操作したときに、取得される色情報に基づく色を吸い取るイメージを表現することも可能である。また、混色モードにおいては、既に取得される色情報に基づく色を予め表示しておき、新たにスポイト機能を用いた場合に、徐々に混ぜ合わされるイメージを表示することが可能となる。
Further, by providing a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display, it is also possible to express an image that absorbs a color based on the acquired color information when the color acquisition button 132 is operated. Further, in the color mixture mode, it is possible to display a color based on the already acquired color information in advance and display an image that is gradually mixed when a dropper function is newly used.
なお、電子ペン130に用いられる液晶表示装置や有機ELディスプレイなどの表示装置の大きさは小さいことから、上述したアニメーション表示を行ってもユーザには視認しづらいものとなる。そのため、これら表示装置を用いた場合であっても、本実施形態と同様に、取得された色情報に基づく色の表示や、生成された色情報に基づく色の表示に切り替えてもよい。
In addition, since the size of a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display used for the electronic pen 130 is small, it is difficult for the user to visually recognize the animation display described above. Therefore, even when these display devices are used, the display may be switched to the color display based on the acquired color information or the color display based on the generated color information, as in the present embodiment.
本実施形態では、スポイト機能を使用したときに得られる色情報に基づく色や、該スポイト機能により混ぜ合わされる色情報に基づく色を色表示エリア全体で表示している。しかしながら、スポイト機能を用いたときの色取得用ボタン132の操作時間、色取得用ボタン132の操作回数、或いは、色取得用ボタン132の操作時の圧力から、取得される色の容量を擬似的に求め、求めた容量に合わせて発光させるLEDの数を決定することも可能である。このような処理は、単色モードであっても、混色モードであっても適用することが可能である。
In this embodiment, the color based on the color information obtained when the dropper function is used and the color based on the color information mixed by the dropper function are displayed in the entire color display area. However, the capacity of the acquired color is simulated based on the operation time of the color acquisition button 132 when the dropper function is used, the number of operations of the color acquisition button 132, or the pressure when the color acquisition button 132 is operated. It is also possible to determine the number of LEDs that emit light according to the obtained capacity. Such a process can be applied in the single color mode or the mixed color mode.
この場合、描画時における電子ペン130の入力スイッチ131と携帯型電子情報端末機10の第1表示部25に摺接される時間を計測し、計測した時間に応じて、発光させるLEDの数を減らしていくことができる。つまり、色表示エリアにおいては、取得した色情報の残量の表示を擬似的に表示させることができる。
In this case, the time of sliding contact with the input switch 131 of the electronic pen 130 and the first display unit 25 of the portable electronic information terminal 10 at the time of drawing is measured, and the number of LEDs that emit light is determined according to the measured time. It can be reduced. That is, in the color display area, the display of the remaining amount of the acquired color information can be displayed in a pseudo manner.
本実施形態では、単色モードにおいては、色取得用ボタン132を操作して新たに得られた色情報に基づいた色の表示に切り替え、混色モードでは、スポイト機能を用いて色情報を取得するたびに混ぜ合わされた色が表示されるようにしている。つまり、混色モードにおいては、先に得られている色と新たに取得した色とを混ぜ合わせていく処理が繰り返し実行されることから、ユーザの意図する色同士で色を混ぜ合わせることができない。このため、ユーザの意図する色同士で色を混ぜ合わせることができるように、第1表示部25の表示装置70にリセットボタンを表示する、或いは、電子ペン130に記憶されている色情報を初期化するリセットボタンを設けてもよい。
In the present embodiment, in the single color mode, the color acquisition button 132 is operated to switch to the color display based on the newly obtained color information, and in the mixed color mode, the color information is acquired every time using the dropper function. The color mixed with is displayed. In other words, in the color mixture mode, the process of mixing the previously obtained color and the newly acquired color is repeatedly executed, so it is not possible to mix colors between colors intended by the user. Therefore, a reset button is displayed on the display device 70 of the first display unit 25 or the color information stored in the electronic pen 130 is initialized so that colors can be mixed with colors intended by the user. A reset button may be provided.
なお、本実施形態では、電子ペン130が単色モードと混色モードとの双方を備えている場合について述べているが、これに限定される必要はなく、単色モード又は混色モードのいずれか一方のモードを備えた電子ペンであってもよい。
In this embodiment, the case where the electronic pen 130 has both the single color mode and the mixed color mode is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and either the single color mode or the mixed color mode is used. It may be an electronic pen equipped with.
本実施形態では、電子ペン130のスポイト機能を第1表示部25に対して有効としているが、これに限定される必要はなく、第2表示部28に表示されるライブラリ画面に使用される色の情報を取得することも可能である。
In the present embodiment, the eyedropper function of the electronic pen 130 is enabled for the first display unit 25, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the color used for the library screen displayed on the second display unit 28. It is also possible to acquire the information.
本実施形態に示した携帯型電子情報端末機においては、スライタスペンからなる電子ペンを用いた入力操作を前提に説明しているが、この他に、ユーザの指による入力操作も受け付けることができる。この場合、ユーザが指により、或いは一般的な電子ペンを用いて、意図する色を抽出できるようにしてもよい。ここで、指や電子ペン40による色を抽出する方法としては、例えば、第1表示部25に予め処理コマンドを表示しておき、処理コマンドを選択した後、ユーザが意図する色が表示されている領域を指や電子ペン40を当接する動作を行う方法や、意図する色が表示されている領域を指や電子ペン40で所定の操作(例えば二回連続して当接する)を行う方法が挙げられる。
The portable electronic information terminal shown in the present embodiment has been described on the premise of an input operation using an electronic pen made of a slitus pen, but in addition to this, an input operation with a user's finger can also be accepted. In this case, the user may be able to extract an intended color with a finger or using a general electronic pen. Here, as a method of extracting the color with the finger or the electronic pen 40, for example, a processing command is displayed on the first display unit 25 in advance, and after the processing command is selected, the color intended by the user is displayed. A method of performing an operation of abutting a finger or the electronic pen 40 on a region that is present, or a method of performing a predetermined operation (for example, continuously abutting twice) on a region where an intended color is displayed with the finger or the electronic pen 40 Can be mentioned.
図39(a)に示すように、第1表示部25に画像P6が表示されている場合、ユーザが画像P6中の所定位置の色を抽出することを例に挙げて説明する。ユーザが意図する色が表示されている箇所にユーザの指を当接させる。なお、図39(a)においては、符号170で示す位置がユーザの指が当接した位置となる。そして、ユーザの指を第1表示部25の意図する位置に当接させると、当接した位置の周縁部の領域(図39(a)に示すハッチングの領域171)が、指が当接した位置の色で仄かに表示される。なお、指が当接した位置の周縁部の領域を、指が当接した位置の色で仄かに表示するようにしているが、これに限定される必要はなく、指が当接した位置の近傍に、指が当接した位置の色を表示させる表示枠を設け、この表示枠に指が当接した位置の色を表示させることも可能である。
As shown in FIG. 39 (a), an example will be described in which the user extracts a color at a predetermined position in the image P6 when the image P6 is displayed on the first display unit 25. The user's finger is brought into contact with the portion where the color intended by the user is displayed. In FIG. 39A, the position indicated by reference numeral 170 is the position where the user's finger abuts. Then, when the user's finger is brought into contact with the intended position of the first display unit 25, the finger is brought into contact with the peripheral region (hatched region 171 shown in FIG. 39A) at the contacted position. It is displayed in the color of the position. In addition, although the area | region of the peripheral part of the position which the finger contact | abutted is displayed with the color of the position which the finger contact | abutted, it is not necessarily limited to this, The position of the position where the finger contact | abutted It is also possible to provide a display frame in the vicinity for displaying the color of the position where the finger is in contact, and display the color of the position where the finger is in contact with this display frame.
例えば、抽出した色を他の位置に移動させる場合、ユーザは、第1表示部25に当接した指を、意図する位置まで摺動させる。この指の摺動に合わせて、抽出された色が仄かに表示される領域171が移動する(図39(b)参照)。そして、ユーザが意図する位置まで指を摺動させた後、描画に係る入力操作を行うと、抽出した色を用いた描画が行える。以下、描画としてはイラストや絵を描く他に、文字を書くことが含まれる。
For example, when moving the extracted color to another position, the user slides the finger in contact with the first display unit 25 to the intended position. A region 171 in which the extracted color is far displayed moves in accordance with the sliding of the finger (see FIG. 39B). When an input operation related to drawing is performed after sliding the finger to a position intended by the user, drawing using the extracted color can be performed. Hereinafter, drawing includes writing characters in addition to drawing illustrations and drawings.
以下、指やポインタによりユーザの意図する色を抽出し、描画を行う場合の処理の流れを、図40のフローチャートに基づいて説明する。このフローチャートの処理は、第1表示部25において編集画面を表示させたことを契機に実行される。
Hereinafter, the flow of processing when drawing a color intended by the user with a finger or a pointer and performing drawing will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The processing of this flowchart is executed when the editing screen is displayed on the first display unit 25.
ステップS801は、色抽出を行う入力操作があるか否かを判定する処理である。上述したように、指又は電子ペン40が第1表示部25に当接されると、第1表示部25のタッチパネル71により、当接された位置が検出される。これにより、コントローラ56からCPU59に検出された位置情報が出力される。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力される位置情報に基づいて、入力された操作が、色抽出を行う入力操作であるか否かを判定する。
Step S801 is processing for determining whether or not there is an input operation for performing color extraction. As described above, when the finger or the electronic pen 40 comes into contact with the first display unit 25, the touched position is detected by the touch panel 71 of the first display unit 25. As a result, the detected position information is output from the controller 56 to the CPU 59. Based on the position information output from the controller 56, the CPU 59 determines whether or not the input operation is an input operation for performing color extraction.
例えば、制御コマンドを表示している場合には、コントローラ56から出力された位置情報が第1表示部25に表示される色抽出用の制御コマンドが表示される領域内であれば、色抽出を行う入力操作が行われたと判定する。この場合、CPU59は、ステップS801の判定結果をYesとし、ステップS802に進む。一方、コントローラ56から出力された位置情報が第1表示部25に表示される色抽出用の制御コマンドが表示される領域外となる場合、色抽出を行う入力操作は行われていないと判定する。この場合、CPU59は、ステップS801の判定結果をNoとし、ステップS806に進む。
For example, when a control command is displayed, if the position information output from the controller 56 is within the area where the control command for color extraction displayed on the first display unit 25 is displayed, color extraction is performed. It is determined that the input operation to be performed has been performed. In this case, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S801 to Yes, and proceeds to step S802. On the other hand, when the position information output from the controller 56 is outside the area where the color extraction control command displayed on the first display unit 25 is displayed, it is determined that the input operation for performing color extraction has not been performed. . In this case, the CPU 59 determines No in step S801 and proceeds to step S806.
ここで、色抽出を行う入力操作として、制御コマンドを表示する場合を例示しているが、これに限定される必要はなく、指や電子ペン40を複数回連続して第1表示部25に当接させる動作を、色抽出を行う入力操作とする場合には、ステップS801の判定処理は、コントローラ56から出力される位置情報が複数回連続して出力されたか否かによって判定すればよい。
Here, a case where a control command is displayed as an input operation for performing color extraction is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a finger or an electronic pen 40 is continuously displayed on the first display unit 25 a plurality of times. When the contact operation is an input operation for performing color extraction, the determination process in step S801 may be determined based on whether or not the position information output from the controller 56 has been continuously output a plurality of times.
ステップS802は、色情報を抽出する処理である。CPU59は、表示制御回路55に対して、色情報を取得する旨の信号を、コントローラ56から出力された位置情報とともに出力する。これを受けて、表示制御回路55は、第1表示部25に表示される画像から、入力された位置情報に基づく画素の色情報を取得する。これにより、入力操作が行われた位置の色情報が抽出される。
Step S802 is processing for extracting color information. The CPU 59 outputs a signal for obtaining the color information to the display control circuit 55 together with the position information output from the controller 56. In response to this, the display control circuit 55 acquires pixel color information based on the input position information from the image displayed on the first display unit 25. Thereby, the color information of the position where the input operation is performed is extracted.
ステップS803は、抽出した色情報を表示する処理である。表示制御回路55は、入力された位置情報に対する所定範囲の領域に含まれる画素の色情報と、抽出した色情報とを合成する。この場合、抽出した色情報が仄かに表示されればよいので、所定範囲の領域に含まれる画素の色情報(R,G,B値等)に対して、抽出した色情報をそのまま合成する必要はなく、抽出した色情報(R,G,B値)に対して所定の係数α(0<α<1)を乗算した値を、所定範囲の領域に含まれる画素の色情報(R,G,B値等)に合成すればよい。また、入力された位置情報に対する所定範囲の領域に含まれる画素の色情報と、抽出した色情報とを合成せずに、所定範囲の領域に含まれる画素の色情報を、指により指定された位置の色情報に差し替えてもよい。
Step S803 is a process for displaying the extracted color information. The display control circuit 55 synthesizes the color information of the pixels included in the predetermined range area with respect to the input position information and the extracted color information. In this case, it is only necessary to display the extracted color information much, so it is necessary to synthesize the extracted color information as it is with the color information (R, G, B values, etc.) of the pixels included in the predetermined range of area. Rather, a value obtained by multiplying the extracted color information (R, G, B values) by a predetermined coefficient α (0 <α <1) is used as the color information (R, G) of the pixels included in the region of the predetermined range. , B value, etc.). Also, the color information of the pixels included in the predetermined range area is specified by the finger without combining the color information of the pixels included in the predetermined range area with respect to the input position information and the extracted color information. It may be replaced with position color information.
ステップS804は、入力操作の位置の移動があるか否かを判定する処理である。ユーザの指や電子ペン40が当接した位置は、タッチパネル71により検知されることから、ユーザの指や電子ペン40が摺動すると、当接したユーザの指や電子ペン40の位置が逐次コントローラ56を介してCPU59に出力される。これを受けて、CPU59は、入力される位置情報が変化しているか否かを判定する。位置情報が変化している場合、CPU59は、ステップS804の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS805に進む。一方、位置情報が変化していない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS804の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS806に進む。
Step S804 is a process for determining whether or not the position of the input operation has been moved. Since the position where the user's finger or the electronic pen 40 abuts is detected by the touch panel 71, when the user's finger or the electronic pen 40 slides, the position of the abutting user's finger or the electronic pen 40 is sequentially changed to the controller. 56 to the CPU 59. In response to this, the CPU 59 determines whether or not the input position information has changed. If the position information has changed, the CPU 59 determines Yes in step S804. In this case, the process proceeds to step S805. On the other hand, if the position information has not changed, the CPU 59 determines No in step S804. In this case, the process proceeds to step S806.
ステップS805は、色情報の表示の位置を移動させる処理である。CPU59は、コントローラ56から出力された位置情報を表示制御回路55に出力する。これを受けて、表示制御回路55は、入力される位置情報に基づき、抽出した色情報を表示させる領域(上述した所定範囲の領域)を移動させる。そして、抽出した色情報と、移動した所定範囲の領域に含まれる画素の色情報とを合成する。そして、表示制御回路55は、合成した色情報を用いて、対象となる画素を表示する。これにより、抽出された色情報が表示される位置が順次変化する。
ステップS806は、描画の入力操作があるか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ56からCPU59に入力される位置情報から、ユーザによる指や電子ペン40の入力操作が描画に基づく入力操作と判定される場合、CPU59は、ステップS806の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS807に進む。一方、ユーザによる指や電子ペン40の入力操作が描画に基づく入力操作と判定できない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS806の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS808に進む。 Step S805 is processing to move the display position of the color information. TheCPU 59 outputs the position information output from the controller 56 to the display control circuit 55. In response to this, the display control circuit 55 moves the area (the above-described predetermined area) where the extracted color information is displayed based on the input position information. Then, the extracted color information and the color information of the pixels included in the moved predetermined range area are synthesized. Then, the display control circuit 55 displays the target pixel using the synthesized color information. As a result, the position where the extracted color information is displayed sequentially changes.
Step S806 is processing to determine whether or not there is a drawing input operation. When it is determined from the position information input from thecontroller 56 to the CPU 59 that the user's finger or electronic pen 40 input operation is an input operation based on drawing, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S806 to Yes. In this case, the process proceeds to step S807. On the other hand, when the input operation of the finger or the electronic pen 40 by the user cannot be determined as the input operation based on the drawing, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S806 to No. In this case, the process proceeds to step S808.
ステップS806は、描画の入力操作があるか否かを判定する処理である。コントローラ56からCPU59に入力される位置情報から、ユーザによる指や電子ペン40の入力操作が描画に基づく入力操作と判定される場合、CPU59は、ステップS806の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、ステップS807に進む。一方、ユーザによる指や電子ペン40の入力操作が描画に基づく入力操作と判定できない場合には、CPU59は、ステップS806の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS808に進む。 Step S805 is processing to move the display position of the color information. The
Step S806 is processing to determine whether or not there is a drawing input operation. When it is determined from the position information input from the
ステップS807は、入力操作に基づく描画を表示する処理である。ステップS806により、描画に基づく入力操作であれば、CPU59は入力操作に基づいて入力される位置情報と、描画の種類を示す信号とを表示制御回路55に出力する。表示制御回路55は、入力される信号及び情報に基づいて描画処理を実行する。この際に、抽出した色情報があれば、表示制御回路55は、その色情報を用いて描画処理を行う。これにより、指や電子ペン40に基づいた入力操作の軌跡に合わせた描画が第1表示部25に表示される。
Step S807 is processing for displaying a drawing based on the input operation. In step S806, if the input operation is based on drawing, the CPU 59 outputs position information input based on the input operation and a signal indicating the type of drawing to the display control circuit 55. The display control circuit 55 executes a drawing process based on the input signal and information. At this time, if there is extracted color information, the display control circuit 55 performs drawing processing using the color information. As a result, a drawing that matches the locus of the input operation based on the finger or the electronic pen 40 is displayed on the first display unit 25.
ステップS808は、描画の入力操作を終了するか否かを判定する処理である。ユーザの指や電子ペン40の入力操作に基づいて、コントローラ56から出力される位置情報に基づいて、CPU59は、描画の入力操作が終了したか否かを判定する。コントローラ56から出力される位置情報から、描画の入力操作が終了するとCPU59が判定できれば、CPU59はステップS808の判定結果をYesとする。この場合、図40に示すフローチャートの処理が終了する。一方、描画の入力操作が終了するとCPU59が判定できない場合、CPU59は、ステップS808の判定結果をNoとする。この場合、ステップS801に戻る。
Step S808 is processing for determining whether or not to end the drawing input operation. Based on the position information output from the controller 56 based on the input operation of the user's finger or the electronic pen 40, the CPU 59 determines whether or not the drawing input operation has ended. If the CPU 59 can determine from the position information output from the controller 56 that the drawing input operation is completed, the CPU 59 sets the determination result in step S808 to Yes. In this case, the process of the flowchart shown in FIG. 40 ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 59 cannot determine when the drawing input operation is completed, the CPU 59 determines No in step S808. In this case, the process returns to step S801.
このようにして、指や電子ペン40の操作により色の抽出処理や、抽出処理された色情報を用いて描画を行うことができる。
In this manner, color extraction processing can be performed by operating the finger or the electronic pen 40, and drawing can be performed using the extracted color information.
本実施形態では、第1表示部25及び第2表示部28の2つの表示部からなる携帯型電子情報端末機を例に取り上げているが、これに限定される必要はなく、1個の表示部からなる携帯型電子情報端末機であってもよい。
In the present embodiment, a portable electronic information terminal comprising two display units, the first display unit 25 and the second display unit 28, is taken as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one display is possible. It may be a portable electronic information terminal comprising parts.
本実施形態では、携帯型電子情報端末機10に対して入力操作を行う電子ペン130を例に取り上げているが、これに限定される必要はなく、例えばコンピュータなどを用いて描画を行う際に使用されるペン型のポインティングデバイスに用いることが可能である。
In this embodiment, the electronic pen 130 that performs an input operation on the portable electronic information terminal 10 is taken as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when drawing is performed using a computer or the like. It can be used for a pen-type pointing device to be used.
本発明では、携帯型電子情報端末機と、該携帯型電子情報端末機に用いられる電子ペンとを例に取り上げて説明しているが、これに限定する必要はなく、コンピュータと、該コンピュータに対して用いられるポインティングデバイスとしてもよい。
In the present invention, the portable electronic information terminal and the electronic pen used in the portable electronic information terminal are described as examples. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the computer and the computer It is good also as a pointing device used for it.
本実施形態では、携帯型電子情報端末機における画像編集の処理について説明しているが、画像編集プログラムを実行することでコンピュータに実行させることも可能である。つまり、図14及び図15のフローチャートの手順、図26から図28のフローチャートの手順、図34のフローチャートの手順、図38のフローチャートの手順及び図40のフローチャートの手順のいずれか1つの手順を、コンピュータに実行させることが可能な、コンピュータ読み取り可能な画像編集プログラムであってもよい。この場合、画像編集プログラムは、メモリーカード、光学ディスク、磁気ディスクなど、コンピュータにて読み取り可能な記憶媒体に記憶されていることが望ましい。
In this embodiment, the image editing process in the portable electronic information terminal is described. However, the image editing program can be executed by a computer. That is, the procedure of the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 and 15, the procedure of the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 to 28, the procedure of the flowchart of FIG. 34, the procedure of the flowchart of FIG. 38, and the procedure of the flowchart of FIG. It may be a computer-readable image editing program that can be executed by a computer. In this case, the image editing program is preferably stored in a computer-readable storage medium such as a memory card, an optical disk, or a magnetic disk.
Claims (27)
- 画像を表示する表示領域を備えた表示部と、
前記表示部の前記表示領域内に表示される前記画像に対して、前記画像を操作する際の制御ポイントを設定する設定部と、
前記表示部に表示される画像の大きさが前記表示領域の大きさよりも大きいときに、前記表示領域に表示される当該画像の一部領域に対して前記制御ポイントを再設定する再設定部と、
前記表示領域に前記画像を表示するとともに、前記画像の表示状態に応じて、前記設定部により設定される前記制御ポイント、又は前記再設定部により再設定される前記制御ポイントのいずれかの制御ポイントを表示させる表示制御部と、
を備えたことを特徴とする画像編集装置。 A display unit having a display area for displaying an image;
A setting unit for setting a control point when operating the image with respect to the image displayed in the display area of the display unit;
A resetting unit for resetting the control point with respect to a partial region of the image displayed in the display region when the size of the image displayed on the display unit is larger than the size of the display region; ,
A control point for displaying the image in the display area and either the control point set by the setting unit or the control point reset by the resetting unit according to the display state of the image A display control unit for displaying
An image editing apparatus comprising: - 請求項1に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記制御ポイントは、前記画像を拡縮させる制御ポイント、又は前記画像を回転させる制御ポイントからなることを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 1,
The image editing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the control point includes a control point for scaling the image or a control point for rotating the image. - 請求項2に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記再設定部は、前記表示部に表示される画像の大きさが前記表示領域の大きさよりも大きいときに、前記表示領域に表示される前記画像の一部領域に対して前記制御ポイントを再設定することを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 2,
The resetting unit resets the control point with respect to a partial region of the image displayed in the display region when the size of the image displayed on the display unit is larger than the size of the display region. An image editing apparatus characterized by setting. - 請求項1から請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記画像に対してトリミング処理を実行する画像処理部をさらに備え、
前記画像処理部により前記トリミング処理が実行された画像が表示されたときに、前記再設定部は、前記トリミング処理を施す前の画像に対して設定された制御ポイントを、前記トリミング処理が実行された画像に対して設定された制御ポイントに設定し直すことを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
An image processing unit that performs a trimming process on the image;
When the image on which the trimming process has been performed by the image processing unit is displayed, the resetting unit performs the trimming process on the control points set for the image before the trimming process is performed. An image editing apparatus for resetting a control point set for an image. - 請求項4に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記表示制御部は、前記画像処理部による前記トリミング処理を再度実行する場合に、前記トリミング処理を実行する直前の画像及び前記トリミング処理の前に設定された制御ポイントを表示することを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 4,
The display control unit displays an image immediately before executing the trimming process and a control point set before the trimming process when the trimming process by the image processing unit is performed again. Image editing device. - 請求項5に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記表示制御部は、前記トリミング処理により切り出される第1の領域と、該第1の領域を除いた第2の領域との表示態様を異なる表示態様にて表示することを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 5, wherein
The display control unit displays the display mode of the first region cut out by the trimming process and the second region excluding the first region in different display modes. . - 複数の画像を重ね合わせて表示する表示部と、
前記複数の画像のいずれか1つの画像を移動させて、他の画像との重ね合わせを一旦解除した後、移動させた画像を前記他の画像に重ね合わせたときに、重ね合わされる画像の表示順位を変更する表示制御部と、
を備えたことを特徴とする画像編集装置。 A display unit for displaying a plurality of images in a superimposed manner;
Display of an image to be superimposed when any one of the plurality of images is moved to cancel the overlay with another image and then the moved image is superimposed on the other image A display control unit for changing the order;
An image editing apparatus comprising: - 請求項7に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記表示部は、前記複数の画像を表示する表示領域を備え、
前記移動させた画像が前記表示領域の外周縁に到達したことを受けて、前記表示順位の変更を許可する許可部を備えていることを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 7, wherein
The display unit includes a display area for displaying the plurality of images,
An image editing apparatus comprising: a permission unit that permits the display order to be changed in response to the moved image reaching the outer periphery of the display area. - 請求項7又は請求項8に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記表示順位は、前記移動させた画像に対する前記他の画像の位置関係によって変更されることを特徴とする画像編集装置。 In the image editing apparatus according to claim 7 or 8,
The image editing apparatus, wherein the display order is changed according to a positional relationship of the other image with respect to the moved image. - 請求項9に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記表示制御部は、前記移動させた画像を前記他の画像に近づけるように移動させたときに、前記移動させた画像に対して1つの画像が所定範囲内に位置する場合に、前記移動させた画像の表示順位と前記1つの画像の表示順位とを入れ替えることを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein
The display control unit moves the moved image when one image is located within a predetermined range with respect to the moved image when the moved image is moved closer to the other image. An image editing apparatus, wherein the display order of the images and the display order of the one image are switched. - 請求項9に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記表示制御部は、前記移動させた画像を前記他の画像に近づけるように移動させたときに、前記移動させた画像に対して2つの画像が所定範囲内に位置する場合に、前記移動させた画像の表示順位が前記2つの画像の表示順位の間となるように、重ね合わされる画像の表示順位を変更することを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein
The display control unit moves the moved image when the two images are located within a predetermined range with respect to the moved image when the moved image is moved closer to the other image. An image editing apparatus, wherein the display order of the images to be superimposed is changed so that the display order of the two images is between the display orders of the two images. - 請求項7から請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記複数の画像のいずれかを移動させる際に操作される操作部材をさらに備えていることを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to any one of claims 7 to 11,
An image editing apparatus, further comprising an operation member operated when moving any of the plurality of images. - 請求項12に記載の画像編集装置において、
前記操作部材は、タッチパネルからなることを特徴とする画像編集装置。 The image editing apparatus according to claim 12, wherein
The image editing apparatus, wherein the operation member includes a touch panel. - 表示領域内に表示される画像に対して、前記画像を操作する際の制御ポイントを設定する設定工程と、
表示される前記画像の大きさが前記表示領域の大きさよりも大きいときに、前記表示領域に表示される前記画像の一部領域に対して前記制御ポイントを再設定する再設定工程と、
前記表示領域に前記画像を表示するとともに、前記画像の表示状態に応じて、前記設定工程により設定される前記制御ポイント、又は前記再設定工程により再設定される前記制御ポイントのいずれかの制御ポイントを表示させる表示工程と、
をコンピュータにて実行させることが可能な、コンピュータ読み取り可能な画像編集プログラム。 A setting step for setting a control point when operating the image with respect to the image displayed in the display area;
A resetting step of resetting the control point for a partial area of the image displayed in the display area when the size of the image to be displayed is larger than the size of the display area;
While displaying the image in the display area, the control point of either the control point set by the setting step or the control point reset by the resetting step according to the display state of the image A display process for displaying,
A computer-readable image editing program that can be executed on a computer. - 複数の画像を重ね合わせて表示する表示工程と、
前記複数の画像のいずれか1つの画像を移動させて、他の画像との重ね合わせを一旦解除した後、移動させた画像を前記他の画像に重ね合わせたときに、重ね合わされる画像の表示順位を変更する表示制御工程と、
をコンピュータにて実行させることが可能な、コンピュータ読み取り可能な画像編集プログラム。 A display process for displaying a plurality of images in a superimposed manner;
Display of an image to be superimposed when any one of the plurality of images is moved to cancel the overlay with another image and then the moved image is superimposed on the other image A display control process for changing the order; and
A computer-readable image editing program that can be executed on a computer. - 複数のページをページ単位で表示する表示装置と、
前記表示装置に表示されたページに対して入力操作を受け付けるタッチパネルと、
前記タッチパネルにて受け付けた入力操作及び該入力操作時の操作方向に基づいて、前記表示装置に表示された前記ページの少なくとも一部を切り離す入力操作が行われたか否かを判定する第1の判定手段と、
前記第1の判定手段により前記ページの少なくとも一部を切り離す入力操作が行われたと判定されたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部を切り離して前記表示装置に表示させる表示制御手段と、
を備えたことを特徴とする電子情報端末機。 A display device that displays a plurality of pages in units of pages;
A touch panel that accepts an input operation on a page displayed on the display device;
First determination for determining whether an input operation for separating at least a part of the page displayed on the display device is performed based on an input operation received on the touch panel and an operation direction at the time of the input operation Means,
Display control means for separating and displaying at least a part of the page on the display device when it is determined by the first determination means that an input operation for separating at least a part of the page has been performed;
An electronic information terminal comprising: - 請求項16に記載の電子情報端末機において、
前記表示制御手段は、前記ページの少なくとも一部が前記表示装置に表示されたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を他の電子情報端末機に送信するための送信先一覧を表示し、
前記送信先一覧から目的の送信先を選択する入力操作を前記タッチパネルが受け付けたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信する送信手段を備えていることを特徴とする電子情報端末機。 The electronic information terminal according to claim 16, wherein
The display control means displays a destination list for transmitting contents input to at least a part of the page to another electronic information terminal when at least a part of the page is displayed on the display device. Display
When the touch panel receives an input operation for selecting a target transmission destination from the transmission destination list, the content input to at least a part of the page is transmitted to the electronic information terminal serving as the target transmission destination. An electronic information terminal comprising transmission means for performing - 請求項17に記載の電子情報端末機において、
前記送信先一覧から目的の送信先を選択する入力操作を前記タッチパネルが受け付けた後、前記タッチパネルにて受け付けた入力操作及び該入力操作時の操作方向に基づいて、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信する入力操作が行われたか否かを判定する第2の判定手段を備え、
前記送信手段は、前記第2の判定手段により前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信する入力操作が行われたと判定されたときに、前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を前記目的の送信先となる電子情報端末機に対して送信することを特徴とする電子情報端末機。 The electronic information terminal according to claim 17, wherein
After the touch panel receives an input operation for selecting a target transmission destination from the transmission destination list, input to at least a part of the page based on the input operation received on the touch panel and the operation direction at the time of the input operation Second determination means for determining whether or not an input operation for transmitting the received content to the electronic information terminal serving as the target transmission destination has been performed,
When the transmission means determines that an input operation for transmitting the content input to at least part of the page by the second determination means to the electronic information terminal serving as the target transmission destination has been performed. In addition, the electronic information terminal transmits the content input to at least a part of the page to the electronic information terminal as the target transmission destination. - 請求項16に記載の電子情報端末機において、
前記切り離された前記ページの少なくとも一部が前記表示装置に表示されたときに、前記タッチパネルにて受け付けた入力操作が前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を削除する入力操作が行われたか否かを判定する第3の判定手段と、
前記第3の判定手段により前記ページの少なくとも一部を削除する入力操作が行われたと判定されたときに、前記前記ページの少なくとも一部に入力された内容を削除する内容削除手段とを、備えていることを特徴とする電子情報端末機。 The electronic information terminal according to claim 16, wherein
When at least a part of the separated page is displayed on the display device, is the input operation accepted by the touch panel performed an input operation that deletes the content input to at least a part of the page? Third determination means for determining whether or not;
Content deletion means for deleting content input to at least part of the page when it is determined by the third determination means that an input operation for deleting at least part of the page has been performed. An electronic information terminal. - 入力操作を受け付ける電子情報端末機の表示画面に当接又は近接される入力部と、
前記入力部が前記表示画面に当接又は近接されたときに操作される第1操作部と、
前記第1操作部の操作時に、前記入力部が当接又は近接した位置における前記表示画面上の色情報を前記電子情報端末機から受信するデバイス側受信部と、
前記デバイス側受信部により受信された色情報に基づいた色を表示する色表示部と、
を備えたことを特徴とするポインティングデバイス。 An input unit that is in contact with or close to the display screen of the electronic information terminal that accepts input operations;
A first operation unit that is operated when the input unit is in contact with or close to the display screen;
A device-side receiver that receives color information on the display screen from the electronic information terminal at a position where the input unit is in contact with or close to the first operation unit;
A color display unit for displaying a color based on the color information received by the device-side receiving unit;
A pointing device comprising: - 請求項20に記載のポインティングデバイスにおいて、
前記第1操作部の操作時間、前記第1操作部の操作回数、或いは前記第1操作部の操作時に加わる圧力に基づいて、前記デバイス側受信部にて受信された前記色情報に基づく色を前記色表示部にレベル表示するデバイス側制御部を備えたことを特徴とするポインティングデバイス。 The pointing device according to claim 20,
Based on the operation time of the first operation unit, the number of operations of the first operation unit, or the pressure applied during operation of the first operation unit, the color based on the color information received by the device-side receiving unit A pointing device comprising a device-side control unit for displaying a level on the color display unit. - 請求項20又は請求項21に記載のポインティングデバイスにおいて、
時間的に前後して複数の色情報を受信した場合に、前記色表示部における色の表示を、時間的に先に受信した色情報に基づく色の表示から、時間的に後に受信した色情報に基づく色の表示に更新する単色モードを有することを特徴とするポインティングデバイス。 The pointing device according to claim 20 or 21,
When a plurality of color information is received before and after the time, the color information received after the time from the color display based on the color information received earlier in time is displayed. A pointing device having a single color mode for updating to a color display based on - 請求項20から請求項22のいずれか1項に記載のポインティングデバイスにおいて、
時間的に前後して複数の色情報を受信した場合に、前記色表示部における色の表示を、時間的に先に受信した色情報に基づく色の表示から、前記複数の色情報のそれぞれに基づく色を混ぜ合わせることで得られる色の表示に更新する混色モードを有することを特徴とするポインティングデバイス。 The pointing device according to any one of claims 20 to 22,
When a plurality of color information is received before and after the time, the color display in the color display unit is changed from the color display based on the color information received earlier in time to each of the plurality of color information. A pointing device characterized by having a color mixing mode for updating to a color display obtained by mixing colors based on. - 請求項23に記載のポインティングデバイスにおいて、
前記混色モードにおいて、時間的に前後して得られる複数の色情報をそれぞれ受信したときの前記第1操作部の操作時間、前記第1操作部の操作回数、或いは前記第1操作部の操作時に加わる圧力に基づいて、前記複数の色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせる際の比率を設定する比率設定部と、
前記比率設定部により設定される比率を用いて、前記時間的に前後して受信される複数の色情報に基づく色を混ぜ合わせることで得られる色の色情報を生成する生成部と、
を備えていることを特徴とすることを特徴とするポインティングデバイス。 The pointing device according to claim 23.
In the color mixture mode, the operation time of the first operation unit, the number of operations of the first operation unit, or the operation of the first operation unit when a plurality of pieces of color information obtained before and after are received respectively. A ratio setting unit that sets a ratio when mixing colors based on the plurality of color information based on the applied pressure;
A generation unit that generates color information of a color obtained by mixing colors based on a plurality of pieces of color information received before and after using the ratio set by the ratio setting unit;
A pointing device comprising: a pointing device. - 請求項23又は請求項24に記載のポインティングデバイスにおいて、
前記色表示部は、前記時間的に前後して受信した複数の色情報に基づく色が混ぜ合わされる様子を示す動画表示を行うことを特徴とするポインティングデバイス。 25. A pointing device according to claim 23 or claim 24.
The pointing device according to claim 1, wherein the color display unit displays a moving image showing a state in which colors based on a plurality of color information received before and after the time are mixed. - 請求項23から請求項25のいずれか1項に記載のポインティングデバイスにおいて、
前記デバイス側受信部にて受信した色情報、又は前記生成部により生成された色情報を少なくとも1以上記憶する記憶部と、
前記少なくとも1以上の色情報を用いて前記入力操作を行う際に操作される第2操作部と、
をさらに備えていることを特徴とするポインティングデバイス。 The pointing device according to any one of claims 23 to 25,
A storage unit that stores at least one or more pieces of color information received by the device-side receiving unit or color information generated by the generating unit;
A second operation unit operated when performing the input operation using the at least one color information;
A pointing device characterized by further comprising: - 請求項20から請求項26のいずれか1項に記載のポインティングデバイスと、
前記表示画面にタッチパネルを備えた電子情報端末機と、
から構成され、
前記ポインティングデバイスは、
前記入力操作を行う際に使用する色情報を前記電子情報端末機に向けて送信するデバイス側送信部を備え、
前記電子情報端末機は、
前記ポインティングデバイスの前記第1操作部の操作を受けて、前記ポインティングデバイスの入力部が当接又は近接する位置における色情報を前記デバイス側受信部に向けて送信する端末機側送信部と、
前記ポインティングデバイスを用いた入力操作時に前記デバイス側送信部から送信された色情報を受信する端末機側受信部と、
前記端末機側受信部により受信した色情報を用いて、前記ポインティングデバイスを用いた入力操作に基づいた描画を前記表示画面に表示する端末機側制御部と、
を備えたことを特徴とする入力システム。 A pointing device according to any one of claims 20 to 26;
An electronic information terminal equipped with a touch panel on the display screen;
Consisting of
The pointing device is
A device-side transmission unit that transmits color information used when performing the input operation to the electronic information terminal;
The electronic information terminal is
A terminal-side transmission unit that receives the operation of the first operation unit of the pointing device and transmits color information at a position where the input unit of the pointing device is in contact with or close to the device-side reception unit;
A terminal-side receiving unit that receives color information transmitted from the device-side transmitting unit during an input operation using the pointing device;
Using the color information received by the terminal-side receiving unit, a terminal-side control unit that displays a drawing based on an input operation using the pointing device on the display screen;
An input system comprising:
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2011252876 | 2011-11-18 | ||
JP2011-252876 | 2011-11-18 | ||
JP2011252879 | 2011-11-18 | ||
JP2011-252879 | 2011-11-18 | ||
JP2012-057113 | 2012-03-14 | ||
JP2012-057114 | 2012-03-14 | ||
JP2012057114 | 2012-03-14 | ||
JP2012057113 | 2012-03-14 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2013073196A1 true WO2013073196A1 (en) | 2013-05-23 |
Family
ID=48429288
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2012/007389 WO2013073196A1 (en) | 2011-11-18 | 2012-11-16 | Image editing device, image editing program, electronic information terminal device, pointing device, and input system |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2013073196A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2021057817A (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2021-04-08 | キヤノン株式会社 | Display control device, control method of the same, and program |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2000353239A (en) * | 1999-04-26 | 2000-12-19 | Adobe Syst Inc | Discrimination of characteristic pixel color in area consisting of indeterminate pixels |
JP2004180267A (en) * | 2002-09-30 | 2004-06-24 | Canon Inc | Image edit method, image edit device, program, and record medium |
JP2007328029A (en) * | 2006-06-06 | 2007-12-20 | Canon Inc | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and information processing program |
JP2008209845A (en) * | 2007-02-28 | 2008-09-11 | Kenwood Corp | Method of selecting landmark in map, and navigation system |
JP2009151500A (en) * | 2007-12-19 | 2009-07-09 | Sony Corp | Information processor, display control method, and display control program |
JP2011081455A (en) * | 2009-10-02 | 2011-04-21 | Sony Corp | Image processing apparatus, method and program |
-
2012
- 2012-11-16 WO PCT/JP2012/007389 patent/WO2013073196A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2000353239A (en) * | 1999-04-26 | 2000-12-19 | Adobe Syst Inc | Discrimination of characteristic pixel color in area consisting of indeterminate pixels |
JP2004180267A (en) * | 2002-09-30 | 2004-06-24 | Canon Inc | Image edit method, image edit device, program, and record medium |
JP2007328029A (en) * | 2006-06-06 | 2007-12-20 | Canon Inc | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and information processing program |
JP2008209845A (en) * | 2007-02-28 | 2008-09-11 | Kenwood Corp | Method of selecting landmark in map, and navigation system |
JP2009151500A (en) * | 2007-12-19 | 2009-07-09 | Sony Corp | Information processor, display control method, and display control program |
JP2011081455A (en) * | 2009-10-02 | 2011-04-21 | Sony Corp | Image processing apparatus, method and program |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2021057817A (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2021-04-08 | キヤノン株式会社 | Display control device, control method of the same, and program |
JP7362399B2 (en) | 2019-09-30 | 2023-10-17 | キヤノン株式会社 | Display control device and its control method and program |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10591729B2 (en) | Wearable device | |
TWI579732B (en) | Multi display apparatus and control method thereof | |
US9454834B2 (en) | Storage medium storing image processing program for implementing controlled image display according to input coordinate, and information processing device | |
US8884876B2 (en) | Spatially-aware projection pen interface | |
JP5739671B2 (en) | Information processing program, information processing apparatus, information processing system, and information processing method | |
JP5638896B2 (en) | Display control program, display control device, display control system, and display control method | |
KR20180129432A (en) | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same | |
JP5656111B2 (en) | Image composition apparatus and image composition program | |
EP3366101A2 (en) | Electronic apparatus and method for controlling thereof | |
US20120147042A1 (en) | Electronic publication viewer, method for viewing electronic publication, program, and integrated circuit | |
JP5378742B2 (en) | Image processing program and image processing apparatus | |
JP2011248209A (en) | Display device and program | |
JP2000259338A (en) | Input system, display system, presentation system and information storage medium | |
JP4871226B2 (en) | Recognition device and recognition method | |
KR102295823B1 (en) | Method of providing an interface using a mobile device and a wearable device | |
WO2013073196A1 (en) | Image editing device, image editing program, electronic information terminal device, pointing device, and input system | |
JP5328277B2 (en) | Image processing program and image processing apparatus | |
US20150339538A1 (en) | Electronic controller, control method, and control program | |
JP6801947B2 (en) | Display device, display control method and display system | |
CN110120102B (en) | Information processing apparatus and non-transitory computer readable medium | |
JP7119338B2 (en) | Information processing system, information processing device, information processing method and program | |
JP2021036401A (en) | Display device, display method and program | |
JP5570633B2 (en) | Image processing program, image processing apparatus, and image processing method | |
JP5733415B2 (en) | Imaging apparatus and imaging control program | |
JP7342501B2 (en) | Display device, display method, program |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 12849113 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 12849113 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |